WO2023030168A1 - Interface display method and electronic device - Google Patents

Interface display method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023030168A1
WO2023030168A1 PCT/CN2022/114916 CN2022114916W WO2023030168A1 WO 2023030168 A1 WO2023030168 A1 WO 2023030168A1 CN 2022114916 W CN2022114916 W CN 2022114916W WO 2023030168 A1 WO2023030168 A1 WO 2023030168A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
area
brightness
window
interface
display
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/114916
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杜奕全
周雨沛
孙奎全
李凯
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023030168A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023030168A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/26Power supply means, e.g. regulation thereof
    • G06F1/32Means for saving power
    • G06F1/3203Power management, i.e. event-based initiation of a power-saving mode
    • G06F1/3234Power saving characterised by the action undertaken
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of smart terminals, in particular to an interface display method and electronic equipment.
  • the present application provides an interface display method and an electronic device, which not only guarantee the user's viewing experience, but also achieve the purpose of saving power.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display device, including: a detection unit and an adjustment unit, wherein,
  • the detection unit is used to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface;
  • the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
  • the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain the second interface, the brightness of the gaze area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-gazing areas; the non-gazing area is an area other than the gaze area in the interface.
  • the detection unit is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
  • the detection unit is used to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area.
  • the detection unit is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
  • the detection unit is used for: determining the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, the window display type being single-window display or multi-window display.
  • the window display type is single-window display
  • the detection unit is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
  • the detection unit is used for: determining the gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the detection unit is used to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface.
  • the fixation area in , including:
  • the detection unit is used for:
  • the first window area is determined as the gaze area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the detection unit is used to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface.
  • the fixation area in , including:
  • the detection unit is used for:
  • the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
  • the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the adjusting unit is used for: obtaining the first target brightness, and adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; and/or,
  • the power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; and/or ,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the adjustment unit is used to: obtain a brightness setting policy of the non-focus area, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to the brightness setting policy.
  • the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
  • the adjustment unit is used for: determining the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjusting the brightness of the non-watching area to the second target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness, including:
  • the power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; and/or,
  • the power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; and/or,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the brightness setting strategy includes:
  • the non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
  • the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness;
  • the brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: a display and a processor; wherein,
  • the processor is used to: detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device; adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain the second interface, and the gaze area of the second interface
  • the brightness is greater than the brightness of some or all of the areas in the non-faze area; the non-faze area is the area of the interface outside the fixation area.
  • the processor is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
  • the processor is configured to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area.
  • the processor is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
  • the processor is configured to: determine the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, and the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
  • the window display type is single-window display
  • the processor is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
  • the processor is configured to: determine a gaze area according to the focus area, where the gaze area includes the focus area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the processor is configured to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface areas of fixation, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the first window area is determined as the gaze area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the processor is configured to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface areas of fixation, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the processor is configured to: acquire the first target brightness, and adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; or,
  • the power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; or,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the processor is configured to: obtain a brightness setting policy of the non-fixation area, and adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting policy.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
  • the processor is configured to: determine the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the second target brightness.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area to the target brightness, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area to the target brightness, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; or,
  • the power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; or,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the brightness setting strategy includes:
  • the non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
  • the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness;
  • the brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
  • the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the processor is used for:
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method applied to an electronic device, including:
  • the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device
  • the brightness of the fixation area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-fixation areas; the non-fixation area is the area outside the fixation area in the interface.
  • the detection of the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface includes:
  • determining the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area includes: determining according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface The gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, and the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
  • the window display type is single-window display
  • the user's eyeballs' gaze in the interface is determined according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface.
  • the area includes: determining the gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows;
  • the display type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including: obtaining the first window area from at least two window areas, and the first window area is the window area with the largest intersection area with the focus area among the at least two window areas;
  • the first window area is determined as the gaze area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; according to the focus area and the current window display of the first interface
  • the type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including: determining that the intersection area between each window area and the focus area in at least two window areas is equal; maintaining the gaze area and non-gazing area determined in the previous cycle; or, from Select a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from at least two window areas as the gaze area.
  • the multi-window display includes: displaying a single floating window, and/or displaying multiple floating windows, and/or , split screen display, and/or, parallel horizon display.
  • adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: acquiring a first target brightness, and adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  • adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness includes: directly adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; or, adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; The brightness of the area fades to the first target brightness.
  • the brightness of the gaze area is adjusted to the first target brightness, including: obtaining the power of the power supply; the power is not less than the first threshold, according to the first step Gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; or, if the power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold , the length of the first step is less than the second step; or, the power is less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
  • adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: obtaining a brightness setting policy of the non-fixation area, and adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting policy.
  • adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting strategy includes: determining the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area is the second target brightness.
  • adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness includes: directly adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness; or, adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness; The brightness of the gaze area fades to the target brightness.
  • adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness includes: obtaining the power of the power supply; the power is not less than the third threshold, according to the third step Gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the target brightness; or, if the power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the target brightness according to the fourth step length; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third The step length is less than the fourth step length; or, the battery power is less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the brightness setting strategy includes: dividing the non-focused area into several sub-areas, and according to the order of the distances between the several sub-areas and the focused area from small to large, the sub-areas The brightness of the area decreases in turn, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or, according to the order of the minimum distance between the pixel point of the non-focus area and the boundary line of the focus area, the brightness of the pixel points decreases sequentially, and the non-focus area
  • the maximum luminance of the pixels in the gazing area is less than or equal to the first target luminance; or, the luminance of the non-gazing area is set as the second target luminance, and the second target luminance is smaller than the first target luminance.
  • adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: adding a transparent mask layer to the interface; setting the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer , so that the brightness of the focused area is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-focused areas.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when it runs on a computer, the computer executes the program described in any one of the third aspect. method.
  • the present application provides a computer program for executing the method described in the first aspect when the computer program is executed by a computer.
  • all or part of the program in the fifth aspect may be stored on a storage medium packaged with the processor, or part or all may be stored on a memory not packaged with the processor.
  • FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the software structure of the electronic device of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a method for establishing a screen coordinate system in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of the interface in the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2C is a schematic diagram of the interface in the scenario of a single floating window in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram of the interface in the multi-floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2E is a schematic diagram of the interface in the split-screen display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2F is a schematic diagram of the interface in the parallel horizon display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a method for determining a gaze area in a single-window display scene according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a method for dividing a non-focused region into subregions according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the scene when the gaze area changes under the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a flowchart of an embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of overlapping gaze areas according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the interface in the single floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8A is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • Fig. 8B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the single floating window scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the interface in the multi-floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the multi-floating window scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of an interface in a split-screen display scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the split-screen display scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12A is a schematic diagram of the interface in the parallel view scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the parallel view scene of the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 14 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • Fig. 15 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • Fig. 16 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • Fig. 18 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an interface display device of the present application.
  • the present application proposes an interface display method and an electronic device, which not only guarantee the user's viewing experience, but also have a relatively better power saving effect.
  • the gaze area of the user's eyeballs on the screen is obtained, and the gaze area is displayed at normal brightness, thereby ensuring the user's viewing experience, and the brightness of the non-gazing area outside the gaze area is lower than the above-mentioned Normal brightness, so as to achieve the purpose of power saving.
  • the brightness of the non-watching area can be adjusted to a relatively low level, even reaching the lowest brightness of the screen, so as to achieve a better power saving effect.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to electronic devices, such as mobile phones, PADs, PCs, TVs, large screens, vehicle-mounted devices, and so on.
  • FIG. 1A shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input and output
  • subscriber identity module subscriber identity module
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flashlight, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled to the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through the CSI interface to realize the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193 , the display screen 194 , the wireless communication module 160 , the audio module 170 , the sensor module 180 and so on.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive a wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for electronic devices through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100.
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • code division multiple access code division multiple access
  • CDMA broadband Code division multiple access
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • time division code division multiple access time-division code division multiple access
  • TD-SCDMA time-division code division multiple access
  • the GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • Beidou navigation satellite system beidou navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active ⁇ matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light emitting diode (flex light ⁇ emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro ⁇ oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color.
  • ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • the electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other files in the external memory card.
  • the internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions.
  • the internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • the audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals.
  • the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the receiver 170B can be placed close to the human ear to receive the voice.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a phone call or sending a voice message, the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 .
  • pressure sensors 180A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 determines the intensity of pressure according to the change in capacitance.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view short messages is executed. When a touch operation whose intensity is greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the icon of the short message application, the instruction of creating a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 is a clamshell machine, the electronic device 100 can detect opening and closing of the clamshell according to the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
  • the electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 100 close to the ear to make a call, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, automatic unlock and lock screen in pocket mode.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds the threshold, the electronic device 100 may reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 100 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the electronic device 100 from being shut down abnormally due to the low temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • the touch sensor 180K is also called “touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the vocal part acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the heart rate detection function.
  • the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations applied to different applications may correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication.
  • the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture. Specifically, it can be Android system, Hongmeng system and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, which are respectively the application program layer, the application program framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer from top to bottom.
  • the application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
  • the application package may include application programs such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
  • application programs such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications.
  • Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on.
  • the view system can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
  • the notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window.
  • prompting text information in the status bar issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
  • the Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
  • the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
  • a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example.
  • the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer.
  • Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • the interface referred to in the embodiment of the present application refers to a visual interface displayed on a screen to interact with a user. Multiple windows can be included in the interface.
  • the window referred to in the embodiment of the present application is a user interface area corresponding to an application program on the screen, and is a visual interface for interaction between the user and the application generating the window.
  • the application creates and displays a window; when the user operates controls in the window, the application reacts accordingly.
  • Each application can display one or more windows on the screen at the same time.
  • the complete display area of the screen of the electronic device is referred to as the screen display area.
  • a window whose display area is a screen display area is called a full-screen window; a window whose display area is smaller than an equal-screen display area is called a non-full-screen window.
  • the above-mentioned window may have a boundary parameter, which is used to record the position of the boundary line of the window.
  • the vertex in the upper left corner of the screen can be used as the origin O
  • the horizontal left screen edge is the x-axis
  • the vertically downward screen edge is the y-axis.
  • each pixel on the screen can have (x, y) coordinates
  • x is used to indicate the row where the pixel is located
  • y is used to indicate the column where the pixel is located
  • the boundary line of the window can also pass through the coordinate system coordinates to identify.
  • the boundary parameter of window 1 shown in Fig. 2A can be (x1, y1, x2, y2)
  • (x1, y1) is the coordinate of vertex A at the upper left corner of window 1
  • (x2, y2) is the window The coordinates of the lower right vertex C of 1.
  • the above boundary parameters of the window can also determine whether the window is a full-screen window or a non-full-screen window. For example, if the screen resolution is 1920*1080, then if the window's boundary parameters are (0,0,1920,1080), then the The window is a full-screen window, otherwise it is a non-full-screen window.
  • the electronic device is a PAD as an example.
  • the interface display method in the embodiment of the present application may be applicable to single-window display scenarios and multi-window display scenarios.
  • the single-window display scene refers to: only one window is displayed on the screen, and this window is a full-screen window, such as shown in Figure 2B, the interface is the desktop of the PAD, including only a full-screen window 201, and the desktop of the PAD is the picture displayed in the full-screen window .
  • the multi-window display scene means that the interface includes at least two windows, and each window can be a full-screen window or a non-full-screen window.
  • the multi-window display scenarios may specifically include: single floating window display, multiple floating window display, split-screen display, parallel horizon display, and the like.
  • a floating window is a movable window floating above a window, and the floating window is generally a non-full-screen window.
  • the interface of application 1 is displayed in 202; if there are 2 or more floating windows above a full-screen window, it can be called a multi-suspension window display scene, as shown in Figure 2D for example, the interface includes a full-screen window 201, the first floating window 203 and the second floating window 204 , the desktop of the PAD is displayed in the full screen window 201 , the interface of the application 1 is displayed in the first floating window 203 , and the interface of the application 2 is displayed in the second floating window 204 .
  • the size of the floating window can generally be adjusted manually; when multiple floating windows are displayed, the sizes of different floating windows can be the same or different.
  • Split-screen display refers to displaying windows of multiple applications on the screen.
  • the windows do not overlap each other.
  • the windows of multiple applications occupy the entire display area of the screen.
  • the windows of the application 1 interface and the The window of the application 2 interface is taken as an example.
  • the interface includes: a first split-screen window 205 and a second split-screen window 206, the first split-screen window 205 displays the interface of application 1, and the second split-screen window 206 displays App 2's interface.
  • Parallel horizon display means that multiple windows of the same application are displayed on the screen. The windows do not overlap each other, and multiple windows occupy the entire display area of the screen. For example, as shown in Figure 2F, two parallel horizon windows are used to display two Take the interface as an example, where the interface includes a first parallel horizon window 207 and a second parallel horizon window 208, the first parallel horizon window 207 displays interface 1 of application 1, and the second parallel horizon window 208 displays interface 2 of application 1 .
  • boundary line 22 there is a common boundary line 22 between two adjacent windows in the parallel horizon display scene.
  • the position of the boundary line can be adjusted artificially, thereby changing the display area of two adjacent windows.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a single-window display scenario. As shown in FIG. 2B , in this scenario, the interface displayed on the screen includes only one full-screen window 201 .
  • the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the interface has a display brightness.
  • the electronic device can take a video image of the user through the front camera of the electronic device, and detect the gaze focus of the user's eyes according to the video image. If the gaze focus is on the screen, determine that the gaze focus is on the screen. For the corresponding area (hereinafter referred to as the focus area), the user's gaze area and non-gazing area are determined according to the focus area, and different display brightnesses are set for the user's gaze area and non-gazing area.
  • the gaze area When determining the gaze area of the user according to the focus area, the gaze area includes the focus area, and optionally, the gaze area is larger than the focus area.
  • the size of the gaze area can be preset, and the gaze area is determined according to the focus area and the preset size.
  • the center point of the focus area can be used as the center point of the gaze area, and a rectangular area with a preset length and width can be determined as the gaze area.
  • the focus area 300 is a rectangle
  • the gaze area 301 is also a rectangle
  • the center points of both rectangles are point O1 .
  • the interface is divided into two parts: a gaze area and a non-gazing area.
  • the interface 30 includes: a gaze area 301 and a non-gazing area 302 .
  • the display brightness of the gazing area 301 may be higher than the display brightness of some or all of the non-gazing area 302 .
  • the display brightness of the gaze area 301 may be determined according to brightness parameters of the screen, that is, displayed according to normal brightness.
  • the same display brightness can be set for the non-watching area 302 , or different display brightness can be set for each area or even pixel, as long as the set display brightness is lower than that of the watching area 301 .
  • the following examples illustrate possible ways of setting the display brightness of the non-watching area 302:
  • the non-attention area 302 can be displayed with the same brightness, which is lower than the brightness of the attention area 301 , and can be as low as the lowest display brightness of the pixel.
  • the non-gazing area 302 may be divided into sub-areas, the brightness of each sub-area is lower than that of the gazing area 301, and at least two sub-areas have different brightnesses.
  • the brightness of the sub-region 1 may be a2
  • the brightness of the sub-region 2 may be a3
  • the brightness of the sub-region 3 may be a4, a1>a2>a3>a4.
  • a4 may be the minimum display brightness of the pixel.
  • the display brightness of the pixels in the non-attention area 302 is gradually reduced according to the distance between the pixels in the non-attention area 302 and the closest boundary line of the attention area 301 from near to far.
  • This implementation method can be regarded as reducing the granularity of sub-region division in the second possible implementation manner from a preset value (multiple pixels) to 1 pixel.
  • the brightness setting methods may be used to set the display brightness for the non-gazing area based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device. For example, when the battery power is higher than the first value (for example, 20%), the brightness of the non-gazing area 302 is set according to the second possible implementation mode, that is, it is darkened sequentially according to the distance from the gazing area from near to far, such as non-gazing area 302. The gazing area 302 is divided into 3 sub-areas.
  • the brightness is respectively 75%, 50%, and 0% of the gazing area brightness;
  • the numerical value such as 10%
  • the brightness of the non-gazing area 302 is set according to the third possible implementation mode, the brightness of the pixels in the non-gazing area gradually becomes darker according to the distance from the boundary line of the watching area; when the power is not higher than the second
  • the numerical value for example, 10%
  • the brightness of the non-attention area 302 becomes 0 directly.
  • the gaze area in the interface also changes accordingly.
  • the display brightness of the area covered during the gaze area change changes accordingly. This change may be an increase in brightness or a decrease in brightness.
  • the gaze area 301 in the interface 30 moves from position 1 shown by the dotted line to position 2 shown by the solid line.
  • the display brightness of the preset fixation area is 100
  • the display brightness of the non-watching area is 0, then the display brightness of area 401 changes from 0 to 100, and the display brightness of area 402 changes from 100 to 0.
  • the original brightness when realizing the change of the above-mentioned display brightness, the original brightness (before the change) may be directly changed to the target brightness (after the change), or the original brightness may be gradually changed to the target brightness. for example:
  • the display brightness of area 402 changes from 100 to 0, it can directly change from 100 to 0, or it can also change from 100 to 0 according to the preset gradient step size.
  • the gradient step size is not limited in the embodiment of this application, for example, the gradient step is 25, then the display brightness of area 402 is gradually changed to 0 in the following way: 100, 75, 50, 25, 0, and the gradient step is 50, then the display brightness of area 402 is gradually changed to 0 in the following way: 100, 50, 0 .
  • the brightness adjustment method directly changing from 100 to 0 can also be regarded as a brightness gradual change method with a gradient step size of 100.
  • the display brightness of the area 402 is gradually changed to 0 according to the gradient step size of 25, that is, the brightness gradually becomes darker from 100, 75, 50, 25, and 0; when the power level is not higher than 20%, when it is higher than 10%, the display brightness of area 402 will gradually change to 0 according to the gradient step size of 50, that is, from brightness 100, 50 and then decrease to 0, and quickly become dark; when the power is not higher than 10%, the area 402 will The display brightness of 402 changes directly from 100 to 0, directly dimming.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in FIG. 5 , the method may include:
  • Step 501 Obtain a video image of the user, detect that the gaze focus of the user's eyes is on the screen according to the video image, and calculate the corresponding focal area of the gaze focus on the screen.
  • a camera may be provided directly above the screen of the electronic device, and the camera may have the function of detecting the user's eyeball gazing at the screen event. If the camera detects the user's eyeball gazing at the screen event, the event may be reported to the camera driver, and the camera driver acquires The eyeball image of the user calculates the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus on the screen according to the eyeball image, and sends the focus area to the processor.
  • the focus area may be an area with a preset size, and the area may be a rectangle or a circle.
  • Step 502 Determine that the current window display type is single-window display.
  • Step 503 Determine the gaze area of the user according to the focus area, and determine whether the gaze area of the user changes, if yes, execute step 505, and if not, execute step 504.
  • the gaze area includes a focus area, and for a specific determination method, reference may be made to the foregoing related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
  • the acquisition of the focus area of the focus of the user's eye on the screen, and then the determination of the focus area is generally carried out periodically.
  • the fixation area determined this time can be compared with the previous one.
  • a determined fixation area is compared to determine whether the fixation area has changed.
  • Step 504 Keep the display brightness of the fixation area and the non-fixation area unchanged, and the flow of this branch ends.
  • Step 505 Obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the fixation area after the change, adjust the brightness of the fixation area from the current brightness to the target brightness after the change; obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the non-fixation area after the change, and adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area after the change The brightness is adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness.
  • the brightness of the changed fixation area when adjusting the brightness of the changed fixation area from the current brightness to the target brightness, the brightness of the changed fixation area can be directly adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness, or the brightness of the changed fixation area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness according to a certain step length.
  • the brightness fades to the target brightness.
  • the larger the step size the faster the gradient speed.
  • the implementation method of directly adjusting the brightness of the gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness can also be considered as the largest step size, that is, the step size is the difference between the target brightness and the current brightness. At this time, Gradients are fastest.
  • different gradient speeds may be used to adjust the brightness of the changed gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the power of the power supply.
  • three brightness adjustment methods with different gradient speeds are preset, then adjusting the brightness of the gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness may include:
  • the battery power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the changed gaze area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the first step;
  • the power is not less than the second threshold, and is less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the changed gaze area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the second step length;
  • the brightness of the gaze area after the change is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step.
  • the overlapping area 603 may be an overlapping area 603 between the gaze area 601 before the change and the gaze area 602 after the change.
  • the overlapping area 603 The display brightness is the target brightness.
  • the display brightness of areas other than the overlapping area 603 in the attention region 602 is less than the target brightness.
  • the areas outside the area 603 are adjusted to the target brightness according to the brightness adjustment method described above.
  • the brightness adjustment of the attention area and the non-attention area can be regarded as two independent processing processes, the adjustment methods of the two can be the same or different, and the gradual change speed of the brightness can be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the non-focus area is divided into sub-regions, and different sub-regions have different brightness
  • the non-focus area can be re-divided into sub-regions, and the brightness adjustments are performed according to the sub-regions.
  • the specific implementation can refer to the above-mentioned adjustment method when the non-focus area has a single brightness.
  • OLED screens At present, many electronic devices use OLED screens.
  • this feature can be used to overlay a transparent mask layer on the interface displayed on the screen, and adjust the brightness of the area in the screen display interface by adjusting the transparency and/or color value of the transparent mask layer.
  • the color of the pixels in the transparent mask layer can be black, expressed as (0,0,0) in RGB, and each pixel in the transparent mask layer can be set to a different transparency, then, a
  • the actual display color of pixel a is the color after the fusion of the color of the pixel a on the interface and the color of the pixel a in the transparent mask layer according to the transparency of the black mask layer.
  • the RGB value of the pixel can be reduced by making the transparent mask layer, and then the brightness of the pixel can be reduced, and the adjustment degree of the pixel brightness can be adjusted by setting the transparency of the pixel in the transparent mask layer.
  • the transparency of the transparent mask layer can be set to a fixed value, and the RGB value of the pixel in the transparent mask layer can be adjusted to adjust the brightness of the interface.
  • is a fixed value
  • the color P of pixel a in the interface remains unchanged
  • the color Q of pixel a in the mask layer changes, then the pixel
  • the actual display color X of a can also be adjusted. Based on this principle, if you want to adjust the brightness of a certain pixel or a certain area in the interface, you only need to set the color value (RGB) of the corresponding pixel or area in the transparent mask layer, and you can achieve it.
  • the transparency and color value (RGB) of pixels in the transparent mask layer can also be adjusted at the same time to adjust the brightness of corresponding pixels in the interface. Based on this principle, if you want to adjust the brightness of a certain pixel or a certain area in the interface, you only need to set the transparency and color value (RGB) of the corresponding pixel or area in the transparent mask layer, and you can achieve it.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a single floating window scenario.
  • the single floating window scenario is shown in FIG. 2C , including a full-screen window 201 and a floating window 202 .
  • the interface 700 is divided into a main window area 701 and a floating window area 702 .
  • the floating window area 702 refers to the area corresponding to the floating window 202 in the interface
  • the main window area 701 refers to the area in the interface except the floating window area 702 .
  • the display brightness of the screen is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 are the same.
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 is adjusted according to whether the focus area is located in the main window area 701 or in the floating window area 702 .
  • the focus area is located in the main window area 701, it means that the user is paying attention to the content displayed in the main window area 701.
  • the main window area 701 is the user's gaze area
  • the floating window area 702 is the user's non-gazing area.
  • the example provides the possible display brightness settings of the fixation area and the non-attention area as follows:
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 can be the same, and the specific display brightness can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen; or,
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be higher than that of the floating window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be based on the brightness parameter of the screen It is determined that the display brightness of the floating window area 702 may be partially or entirely lower than the display brightness of the main window area 701; or,
  • the user uses the floating window to display the application interface in the full-screen window, indicating that the user is relatively more concerned about the displayed content in the floating window.
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window.
  • the display brightness of the window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the floating window area 702.
  • the floating window area 702 is the user's gaze area
  • the main window area 701 is the user's non-gazing area. This embodiment of the application provides gaze
  • the possible display brightness settings for regions and non-focus regions are as follows:
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window Display brightness of area 702 .
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 is lower than that of the floating window area 702, the display brightness of the pixels in the main window area 701 may be the same or different.
  • the following example illustrates the possible setting mode of the display brightness of the main window area 701:
  • the main window area 701 can be displayed with the same display brightness, which is lower than that of the floating window area 702, and can be as low as the lowest display brightness of pixels in the screen.
  • the main window area 701 may be divided into sub-areas, the display brightness of each sub-area is lower than that of the floating window area 702, and at least two sub-areas have different display brightness.
  • the display brightness of each sub-area is lower than that of the floating window area 702
  • at least two sub-areas have different display brightness.
  • the display brightness of the pixels in the main window area 701 is gradually reduced according to the distance between the pixels in the main window area 701 and the closest boundary line of the floating window area 702 from near to far.
  • different brightness setting methods may be used to set the display brightness for the non-gazing area based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device.
  • the main window area 701 and/or the display brightness of the floating window area 702 may change accordingly, such as brightness increase or brightness decrease, etc.
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 and/or floating window area 702 changes, the original brightness (Brightness before change) changes to target brightness (brightness after change), and can also gradually change from original brightness to target brightness.
  • the focus area moves from the main window area 701 to the floating window area 702.
  • the display brightness of the main window area 701 is 100
  • the display brightness of the floating window area 702 is 100
  • the focus area moves to the floating window area 702
  • the brightness of the main window area 701 is 0,
  • the brightness of the floating window area 702 is 100
  • the display brightness of the main window area needs to be changed from 100 to 0, and the main window area
  • the display brightness of 701 can be directly changed from 100 to 0, or it can be gradually changed to 0.
  • the step size of the gradient is not limited in the embodiment of this application.
  • the brightness of the main window area 701 is gradually changed to 0 according to the following process: 100, 75, 50, 25, 0, and the gradient step is 50, then the brightness of the main window area 701 is gradually changed to 0: 100, 50, 0 according to the following process.
  • the interface display method provided by the embodiment of the present application is shown in Figure 8A, for example, the method may include:
  • Step 801 Obtain a video image of the user, detect that the gaze focus of the user's eyes is located on the screen according to the video image, and calculate the corresponding focal area of the gaze focus on the screen.
  • step 501 For the implementation of this step, reference may be made to the corresponding description in step 501, and details are not repeated here.
  • Step 802 Determine that the current window display type is a single-suspended window type.
  • Step 803 Determine whether the gaze area of the user changes according to the focus area, if yes, perform step 805, if not, perform step 804.
  • the gaze area is the area where the focus area is located in the main window area and the floating window area.
  • To determine whether the user's gaze area has changed is whether the focus area acquired this time is in the same area (the main window area or the floating window area) as the focus area acquired in the previous cycle.
  • a pixel point can be selected from the focus area, such as the center point of the focus area, and the user's gaze area can be determined according to the area where the pixel point is located (the main window area or the floating window area), such as the pixel If the point is located in the main window area, then the focus area is the main window area; if the pixel is located in the floating window area, then the focus area is the floating window area.
  • the proportion of the area where the focus area and the main window area intersect in the focus area can be calculated. If the proportion exceeds 50%, the gaze area is the main window area, otherwise the gaze area is the floating window area; similarly, it is also possible to calculate the proportion of the area where the focus area intersects with the floating window area in the focus area. If the proportion exceeds 50%, the gaze area is the floating window area, otherwise the gaze area is the main window area.
  • the processing method can be preset in the electronic device, for example: because the area that the user pays attention to cannot be determined, the gaze area and The non-gazing area remains unchanged, that is, the display brightness of the main window area and the floating window area remains unchanged; or, the general user pays more attention to the floating window, and in this case, it can be determined that the gazing area is the floating window area; and so on.
  • Step 804 Keep the display brightness of the main window area and the floating window area unchanged, and this branch process ends.
  • Step 805 Obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the floating window area, and adjust the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness; obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the main window area, and adjust the display brightness of the main window area from the current brightness to the target brightness. Adjust to target brightness.
  • both the floating window area and the main window area need to be switched between the gaze area and the non-focus area.
  • the change of the gazing area may bring about changes in the display brightness of the floating window area and/or the main window area, and the electronic device can determine whether the gazing area is the floating window area or the main window area. Determine the target brightness for the two regions.
  • the brightness adjustment step for this area may not be performed.
  • the display brightness of the floating window area when adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness, the display brightness of the floating window area can be directly adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness, or the display brightness of the floating window area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness according to a certain step length.
  • the brightness fades to the target brightness.
  • the larger the step size the faster the gradient speed.
  • the implementation method of directly adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness can also be considered as the largest step size, that is, the step size is the difference between the target brightness and the current brightness.
  • the gradient speed is the fastest.
  • the display brightness of the floating window area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness using different gradient speeds according to the power of the power supply.
  • three brightness adjustment methods with different gradient speeds are preset, then adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness may include:
  • the power is not less than the first threshold, and the display brightness of the floating window area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the first step;
  • the power is not less than the second threshold and less than the first threshold, and the display brightness of the floating window area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the second step length;
  • the brightness of the floating window area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step.
  • the method of adjusting the display brightness of the main window area from the current brightness to the target brightness refer to the above-mentioned method of adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness, which will not be repeated here.
  • the brightness adjustment of the main window area and the floating window area can be regarded as two independent processing processes, the display adjustment methods of the two can be the same or different, and the fading speeds can be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the main window area is divided into sub-areas, and different sub-areas have different brightness
  • the adjustment method when the main window area has a single brightness the difference is only that the brightness adjustment of the main window area is subdivided into the brightness adjustment of multiple sub-areas, which will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a scene with multiple floating windows.
  • the interface includes a full-screen window 201, a first floating window 203, and a second floating window 204.
  • FIG. 900 is divided into: a main window area 901 , a first floating window area 902 and a second floating window area 903 .
  • the first floating window area 902 refers to the area where the first floating window is located in the interface
  • the second floating window area 903 is the area where the second floating window is located in the interface
  • the main window area 901 refers to the area in the interface except the first floating window area 902 and the area outside the second floating window area 903 .
  • the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the main window area 901 , the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 are the same.
  • the display brightness of each area in the interface is adjusted according to which area the focus area is located in the main window area 901 , the first floating window area 902 , and the second floating window area 903 .
  • the main window area 901 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 are determined as non-gazing areas. At this time, the user is focusing on the main window area 901
  • the embodiment of this application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
  • the user uses the floating window to display the interface of the application in the main window, indicating that the user pays more attention to the content displayed in the floating window, but the current user is paying attention to the content displayed in the main window area 901, so it is impossible to know what the user is currently concerned about.
  • the specific window area therefore, in a possible implementation manner, the display brightness of the main window area 901, the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 may be the same, and the specific display brightness may be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen; or,
  • the display brightness of the main window area 901 can be higher than the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903; optionally, the main window area 901
  • the display brightness of the screen can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen.
  • the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 can be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the main window area 901.
  • the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 902 and the second The display brightness of the floating window area 903 may be the same or different; or,
  • the display brightness of the main window area 901 can be lower than that
  • the display brightness of a floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903; optionally, the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 901
  • the brightness may be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the floating window area, and the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 may be the same or different.
  • the first floating window area 902 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the main window area 901 and the second floating window area 903 are determined as non-gazing areas.
  • the user is focusing on the first
  • this embodiment of the application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
  • the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 is at least higher than the display brightness of the main window area 901, wherein the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 901 is lower than the first The display brightness of the floating window area 902 .
  • the display brightness of the second floating window area 902 may be the same as or lower than the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 .
  • the display brightness of the second floating window area 903 may be higher than that of the main window area 901 and lower than that of the second floating window area 901. A display brightness of the floating window area 902 .
  • the display brightness setting method provided by the embodiment of the present application can refer to the display brightness setting method when the focus area is located in the first floating window area 902, the only difference is that the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 902
  • the floating window area 903 is interchanged, and details are not described here.
  • the display brightness of each area may change accordingly.
  • the change of the display brightness of each area can be directly changed, or it can be realized through a gradual change.
  • please refer to the figure The corresponding instructions in 3 are not repeated here.
  • the initial display brightness of the interface is the same; for example, as shown in the second picture in Figure 10, the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in the left floating window, and the floating window corresponds to The display brightness of the interface area is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to the floating window on the right becomes lower, and the display brightness of other interface areas is 0; for example, in Figure 10
  • the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in the floating window on the right, the interface area corresponding to the floating window becomes normal brightness, the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to the left floating window becomes low, and other interfaces The display brightness of the area is 0.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method
  • the specific process can refer to the interface display method shown in Figure 8A
  • the main difference from the method shown in Figure 8A is that the focus area is changed from the main window area or
  • the floating window area is further expanded into: the main window area, the first floating window area or the second floating window area, and the display brightness setting methods of the three areas are slightly different.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a split-screen display scene, as shown in FIG. 2E, including a first split-screen window 205 and a second split-screen window 206.
  • the two windows divide the interface 110 into The first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 .
  • the first split-screen area 111 is the area where the first split-screen window is located in the interface
  • the second split-screen area 112 is the area where the second split-screen window is located in the interface.
  • the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 are the same.
  • the display brightness of the above two areas is adjusted.
  • the embodiment of this application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
  • the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 is higher than the display brightness of part or all of the second split-screen area 112 .
  • the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 may be determined according to a brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the second split-screen area 112 is lower than the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 .
  • the second split-screen area 112 can be divided into sub-areas, the display brightness of different sub-areas can be the same or different, the display brightness of each sub-area is not higher than the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111, and the display brightness of at least one sub-area The brightness is lower than the display brightness of the second split screen area 112 .
  • the display brightness setting method of the two areas can refer to the description when the focus area is located in the first split screen area 111, the only difference is that the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 swaps.
  • the display brightness of the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 may change, and the display brightness of each area
  • the change of can be a direct change or a gradual change.
  • the initial display brightness of the interface is the same; It is detected that the focus area is located in window A, the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes lower, the lowest being 0;
  • the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in window B, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes normal, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A becomes low, the lowest possible is 0.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, the specific process can refer to the method shown in Figure 8A, the main difference from the method shown in Figure 8A is that the focus area is in the first split screen area 111 and the second split-screen area 112, and the display brightness settings of the two areas are slightly different, for details, please refer to the corresponding description in FIG. 11A.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in the parallel horizon scene, as shown in Figure 2F, including the first parallel horizon window and the second parallel horizon window, as shown in Figure 12A, the two windows divide the interface 120 into the first parallel horizon window.
  • the viewing horizon area 121 and the second parallel viewing horizon area 122 are the areas where the first parallel horizon window is located in the interface, and the second parallel horizon area 122 is the area where the second parallel horizon window is located in the interface.
  • the display brightness setting method of the first parallel horizon area 121 and the second parallel horizon area 122 in the scene shown in FIG. 12A can refer to the corresponding description in the split-screen display scene in FIG.
  • One split screen area is replaced by the first parallel horizon area
  • the second split screen area is replaced by the second parallel horizon area, which will not be described here.
  • the initial display brightness of the interface is the same;
  • the device detects that the focus area is located in window A, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes lower, the lowest possible is 0;
  • the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in window B, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes normal, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A becomes low, the lowest.
  • this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method.
  • the specific process can refer to the method shown in FIG. 8A.
  • the main difference from the method shown in FIG. and the second parallel horizon region 122, and the display brightness settings of the two regions are slightly different, for details, please refer to the corresponding description in FIG. 12A.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the software structure is applicable to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 .
  • the electronic device is divided into four layers of the Android system in FIG. 1B as an example. From top to bottom, it is the application layer, the framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer.
  • Application layer (Application, App) can include:
  • the screen display module is used to determine and execute the power saving strategy according to the power saving instruction, and receive information such as the focus area and the boundary parameters of the window sent by the power control module;
  • the interface display module is used to determine the fixation area, display the interface, and adjust the display brightness of the fixation area and/or non-attention area in the interface.
  • the interface display module is used for displaying the interface.
  • the framework layer (Framework, FWK) can include:
  • the window displays the power saving frame, which can include:
  • the monitoring module is used to monitor eye gaze events reported by the system library layer, including eye image data;
  • the eye gaze service module is used to receive the eye gaze event and request the window type management module to determine the display type of the current window;
  • the window type management module is used to record the current window display type, including: single window type, multi-window type, and multi-window type can be further subdivided into: single-suspended window, multi-suspended window, split-screen display, parallel horizon and other types ;
  • the window management module corresponding to each window display type is used to manage information such as boundary parameters of the window in the screen, calculate the focus area according to the image data, and send information such as window boundary parameters and focus area to the power control module.
  • the window management module may include: a single window management module, a single floating window management module, a multi-suspension window management module, a parallel horizon management module, a split-screen management module, etc., respectively corresponding to the window display types.
  • the power control module is used to record whether the power saving strategy is implemented, and if the power saving strategy is implemented, information such as power saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas are sent to the screen display module.
  • the display frame is used for processing such as drawing and rendering of the interface.
  • System libraries can include: camera module and display module.
  • the kernel layer can include: camera driver and display driver.
  • the camera driver is used to drive the camera of the hardware layer
  • the display driver is used to drive the display screen of the hardware layer, that is, the screen of the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 14, the method is to combine the interface display method shown in Figure 5 with the schematic flowchart of the software structure shown in Figure 13, as shown in As shown in FIG. 14 , in which, compared with the software structure shown in FIG. 13 , a gaze area determination module is added to record the preset size of the gaze area, such as length and width.
  • the camera at the hardware layer receives the eye gaze event and triggers an interrupt to notify the camera driver at the kernel layer to obtain the eye image data; the camera driver receives the interrupt, obtains the eye image data, converts it into an eye gaze event, and passes through the camera module in the system library Transmission to the monitoring module of the framework layer; the monitoring module monitors the eye gaze event, and sends the eye gaze event to the eye gaze service module, and the eye gaze service module requests the window type management module to determine the current window type; the window type management module determines the current window display type It is a single-window type, and the eye gaze event is sent to the single-window management module; the single-window management module determines the focus area, and sends the boundary parameters of the window and the focus area information to the power control module; Information such as power-saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas are sent to the screen display module of the application layer; the screen display module determines that the power-saving instruction has been received, and sends information such as the focus area and window boundary parameters to the gaze area determination module;
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 15, the method is a schematic flow chart of the method shown in Figure 8A under the software structure shown in Figure 13, as shown in Figure 15 show, among them,
  • the camera at the hardware layer receives the eye gaze event and triggers an interrupt to notify the camera driver at the kernel layer to obtain the eye image data; the camera driver receives the interrupt, obtains the eye image data, converts it into an eye gaze event, and passes through the camera module in the system library Transmission to the monitoring module of the framework layer; the monitoring module monitors the eye gaze event, and sends the eye gaze event to the eye gaze service module, and the eye gaze service module requests the window type management module to determine the current window type; the window type management module determines the current window display type It is a single-suspension window type, and sends eye gaze events to the single-window management module; the single-suspension window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; the power control module determines that it is necessary to implement a power saving strategy , sending information such as power-saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas to the screen display module of the application layer; the screen display module determines that the power-saving instruction has been received,
  • the interface display module determines the gazing area and the non-gazing area, and adjusts the display brightness of the gazing area and/or the non-gazing area in the displayed interface.
  • the interface display module can display the required display interface on the display screen through the display frame, display module, and display driver. In the middle display, the display brightness of the gazing area in the interface displayed on the display screen is higher than the display brightness of all or part of the non-gazing area.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 16, this method is applicable to the scene shown in Figure 9, as shown in Figure 16, it is different from the method shown in Figure 15
  • the window type management module determines that the current window display type is a multi-suspension window type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the multi-window management module
  • the multi-suspension window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the battery
  • the control module the implementation of other parts can refer to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in FIG.
  • the main difference is: the window type management module determines that the current window display type is split-screen display type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the split-screen window management module; the split-screen window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; for the implementation of other parts, reference may be made to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 18, this method is applicable to the scene shown in Figure 12A, as shown in Figure 18, it is different from the method shown in Figure 15
  • the window type management module determines that the current window display type is the parallel horizon display type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the parallel horizon window management module
  • the parallel horizon window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; for the implementation of other parts, reference may be made to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an interface display device.
  • the device 1900 includes: a detection unit 1910 and an adjustment unit 1920 , wherein,
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used to adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain a second interface, the brightness of the gaze area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the areas in the non-gazing area; the non-gazing area is an area other than the gaze area in the interface .
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeball in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeball in the interface according to the focus area.
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to: determine the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, where the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
  • the window display type is single-window display
  • the detection unit 1910 is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
  • the detecting unit 1910 is configured to: determine a gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by the windows; the detection unit 1910 is used to determine the user's eyeball position according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. Gaze areas in the interface, including:
  • the detection unit 1910 is used for:
  • the first window area is determined as the gaze area.
  • the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by the windows; the detection unit 1910 is used to determine the user's eyeball position according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. Gaze areas in the interface, including:
  • the detection unit 1910 is used for:
  • the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to: obtain the first target brightness, and adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
  • the power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; and/or,
  • the power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; and/or ,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to: acquire a brightness setting policy of the non-focus area, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to the brightness setting policy.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
  • the adjusting unit 1920 is configured to: determine the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the second target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
  • the power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; and/or,
  • the power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; and/or,
  • the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  • the brightness setting strategy includes:
  • the non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
  • the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness;
  • the brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
  • the adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including a display and a processor; wherein, the processor is configured to execute the method provided in any one of the above embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 .
  • the present application also provides an electronic device, the device includes a storage medium and a central processing unit, the storage medium may be a non-volatile storage medium, a computer executable program is stored in the storage medium, and the central processing unit and the The non-volatile storage medium is connected, and executes the computer executable program to implement the method provided in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the computer executes the program provided by any one of the embodiments in Fig. 3 to Fig. 18 of the present application. method.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the computer executes the method provided in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 of the present application.
  • "at least one” means one or more, and “multiple” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate that A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone. Among them, A and B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship.
  • “At least one of the following” and similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items.
  • At least one of a, b, and c can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c or a and b and c, where a, b, c can be single, or Can be multiple.
  • any function is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory; hereinafter referred to as: ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter referred to as: RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc, etc.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • magnetic disk or optical disc etc.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

An interface display method and an electronic device. In the method, a gaze area of the eyeballs of a user in a first interface is detected, the first interface is an interface displayed on a screen of an electronic device, and the display brightness of the first interface is adjusted to obtain a second interface, the brightness of the gaze area in the second interface being greater than that of a part or all of a non-gaze area, and the non-gaze area is an area other than the gaze area in the first interface. According to the present application, not only can the viewing experience of users be ensured, but the goal of power saving can also be achieved.

Description

界面显示方法和电子设备Interface display method and electronic device 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及智能终端技术领域,特别涉及一种界面显示方法和电子设备。The present application relates to the technical field of smart terminals, in particular to an interface display method and electronic equipment.
背景技术Background technique
手机、平板电脑等电子设备已融入人类生活的方方面面,成为必不可少的电子产品。而功耗一直是电子设备的痛点问题,困扰着电子设备厂商和消费者。电子设备在运行过程中,最耗电的器件是屏幕。当前,针对屏幕耗电的场景,常见的智能省电方式有屏幕亮度自动调节、自动灭屏等。但是,这些省电方式下,如果屏幕亮度降低过多,用户很难看清屏幕上的显示内容,降低用户的观看体验,如果屏幕亮度降低的很少,对于电子设备的省电效果有限。Electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablet computers have been integrated into all aspects of human life and become indispensable electronic products. Power consumption has always been a pain point of electronic equipment, plaguing electronic equipment manufacturers and consumers. During the operation of electronic equipment, the most power-consuming device is the screen. Currently, for scenarios where the screen consumes power, common intelligent power-saving methods include automatic adjustment of screen brightness and automatic screen off. However, in these power-saving modes, if the brightness of the screen is reduced too much, it is difficult for the user to see the displayed content on the screen, which reduces the viewing experience of the user; if the brightness of the screen is reduced slightly, the power-saving effect on electronic devices is limited.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供了一种界面显示方法和电子设备,既保证用户的观看体验,又达到省电的目的。The present application provides an interface display method and an electronic device, which not only guarantee the user's viewing experience, but also achieve the purpose of saving power.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示装置,包括:检测单元和调整单元,其中,In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display device, including: a detection unit and an adjustment unit, wherein,
检测单元,用于检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域;第一界面是电子设备的屏幕上显示的界面;The detection unit is used to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
调整单元,用于调整第一界面的显示亮度,得到第二界面,第二界面中注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度;非注视区域是界面中注视区域以外的区域。The adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain the second interface, the brightness of the gaze area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-gazing areas; the non-gazing area is an area other than the gaze area in the interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,检测单元用于检测用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the detection unit is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
检测单元用于:确定用户眼球的注视焦点在界面中对应的焦点区域;根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域。The detection unit is used to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,检测单元用于根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the detection unit is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
检测单元用于:根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示或多窗口显示。The detection unit is used for: determining the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, the window display type being single-window display or multi-window display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示,检测单元用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is single-window display, and the detection unit is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
检测单元用于:根据焦点区域确定注视区域,注视区域包括焦点区域。The detection unit is used for: determining the gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;检测单元用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the detection unit is used to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. The fixation area in , including:
检测单元用于:The detection unit is used for:
从至少2个窗口区域中获取第一窗口区域,第一窗口区域是至少2个窗口区域中与焦点区域的相交区域最大的窗口区域;Acquire a first window area from at least two window areas, where the first window area is the window area with the largest intersection area with the focus area among the at least two window areas;
将第一窗口区域确定为注视区域。The first window area is determined as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;检测单元用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the detection unit is used to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. The fixation area in , including:
检测单元用于:The detection unit is used for:
确定至少2个窗口区域中各窗口区域与焦点区域的相交区域相等;Determining that the intersection area between each window area and the focus area in at least two window areas is equal;
维持前一周期确定的注视区域和非注视区域不变;或者,Maintain the fixation area and non-fixation area determined in the previous cycle; or,
从至少2个窗口区域中选择一个非全屏窗口对应的窗口区域作为注视区域。Select a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from at least two window areas as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,多窗口显示包括:单悬浮窗显示,和/或,多悬浮窗显示,和/或,分屏显示,和/或,平行视界显示。In a possible implementation manner, the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元用于:获取第一目标亮度,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度。The adjusting unit is used for: obtaining the first target brightness, and adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
调整单元用于:adjustment unit for:
将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度;和/或,adjusting the brightness of the gaze area directly to the first target brightness; and/or,
将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
调整单元用于:adjustment unit for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;和/或,The power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; and/or,
电量小于第一阈值,不小于第二阈值,按照第二步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长;和/或,The power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; and/or ,
电量小于第二阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度。If the power is less than the second threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元用于:获取非注视区域的亮度设置策略,按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度。The adjustment unit is used to: obtain a brightness setting policy of the non-focus area, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to the brightness setting policy.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
调整单元用于:根据亮度设置策略确定第二目标亮度,将非注视区域的亮度调 整为第二目标亮度。The adjustment unit is used for: determining the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjusting the brightness of the non-watching area to the second target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness, including:
调整单元用于:adjustment unit for:
将非注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度;和/或,directly adjust the brightness of the non-focused area to the target brightness; and/or,
将非注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness, including:
调整单元用于:adjustment unit for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第三阈值,按照第三步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;和/或,The power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; and/or,
电量小于第三阈值,不小于第四阈值,按照第四步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;第三阈值大于第四阈值,第三步长小于第四步长;和/或,The power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; and/or,
电量小于第四阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。If the power is less than the fourth threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,亮度设置策略包括:In a possible implementation manner, the brightness setting strategy includes:
非注视区域划分为若干个子区域,按照若干个子区域与注视区域的距离从小到大的顺序,子区域的亮度依次降低,子区域的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,The non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
按照非注视区域的像素点与注视区域的边界线的最小距离从小到大的顺序,像素点的亮度依次降低,非注视区域的像素点的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,According to the order of the smallest distance between the pixels in the non-focused area and the boundary line of the focused area, the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
设置非注视区域的亮度为第二目标亮度,第二目标亮度小于第一目标亮度。The brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit is used to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元用于:adjustment unit for:
在界面上增加显示透明蒙版层;Add a display transparent mask layer on the interface;
设置透明蒙版层的颜色和/或透明度,使得注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度。Set the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer so that the focus area is brighter than some or all of the non-focus area.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种电子设备,包括:显示器和处理器;其中,In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: a display and a processor; wherein,
处理器用于:检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域;第一界面是电子设备的屏幕上显示的界面;调整第一界面的显示亮度,得到第二界面,第二界面中注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度;非注视区域是界面中注视区域以外的区域。The processor is used to: detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device; adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain the second interface, and the gaze area of the second interface The brightness is greater than the brightness of some or all of the areas in the non-faze area; the non-faze area is the area of the interface outside the fixation area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于检测用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
处理器用于:确定用户眼球的注视焦点在界面中对应的焦点区域;根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域。The processor is configured to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
处理器用于:根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示或多窗口显示。The processor is configured to: determine the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, and the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示,处理器用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is single-window display, and the processor is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
处理器用于:根据焦点区域确定注视区域,注视区域包括焦点区域。The processor is configured to: determine a gaze area according to the focus area, where the gaze area includes the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;处理器用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the processor is configured to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface areas of fixation, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
从至少2个窗口区域中获取第一窗口区域,第一窗口区域是至少2个窗口区域中与焦点区域的相交区域最大的窗口区域;Acquire a first window area from at least two window areas, where the first window area is the window area with the largest intersection area with the focus area among the at least two window areas;
将第一窗口区域确定为注视区域。The first window area is determined as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;处理器用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; the processor is configured to determine the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface areas of fixation, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
确定至少2个窗口区域中各窗口区域与焦点区域的相交区域相等;Determining that the intersection area between each window area and the focus area in at least two window areas is equal;
维持前一周期确定的注视区域和非注视区域不变;或者,Maintain the fixation area and non-fixation area determined in the previous cycle; or,
从至少2个窗口区域中选择一个非全屏窗口对应的窗口区域作为注视区域。Select a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from at least two window areas as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,多窗口显示包括:单悬浮窗显示,和/或,多悬浮窗显示,和/或,分屏显示,和/或,平行视界显示。In a possible implementation manner, the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
处理器用于:获取第一目标亮度,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度。The processor is configured to: acquire the first target brightness, and adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度;或者,Adjust the brightness of the gaze area directly to the first target brightness; or,
将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;或者,The power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; or,
电量小于第一阈值,不小于第二阈值,按照第二步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长;或者,The power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; or,
电量小于第二阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度。If the power is less than the second threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
处理器用于:获取非注视区域的亮度设置策略,按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度。The processor is configured to: obtain a brightness setting policy of the non-fixation area, and adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting policy.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
处理器用于:根据亮度设置策略确定第二目标亮度,将非注视区域的亮度调整为第二目标亮度。The processor is configured to: determine the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the second target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area to the target brightness, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
将非注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度;或者,directly adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness; or,
将非注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area to the target brightness, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第三阈值,按照第三步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;或者,The power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; or,
电量小于第三阈值,不小于第四阈值,按照第四步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;第三阈值大于第四阈值,第三步长小于第四步长;或者,The power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; or,
电量小于第四阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。If the power is less than the fourth threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,亮度设置策略包括:In a possible implementation manner, the brightness setting strategy includes:
非注视区域划分为若干个子区域,按照若干个子区域与注视区域的距离从小到大的顺序,子区域的亮度依次降低,子区域的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,The non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
按照非注视区域的像素点与注视区域的边界线的最小距离从小到大的顺序,像素点的亮度依次降低,非注视区域的像素点的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,According to the order of the smallest distance between the pixels in the non-focused area and the boundary line of the focused area, the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
设置非注视区域的亮度为第二目标亮度,第二目标亮度小于第一目标亮度。The brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the processor is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
处理器用于:The processor is used for:
在界面上增加显示透明蒙版层;Add a display transparent mask layer on the interface;
设置透明蒙版层的颜色和/或透明度,使得注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度。Set the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer so that the focus area is brighter than some or all of the non-focus area.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,应用于电子设备,包括:In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method applied to an electronic device, including:
检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域;第一界面是电子设备的屏幕上显示的界面;Detecting the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
调整第一界面的显示亮度,得到第二界面,第二界面中注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度;非注视区域是界面中注视区域以外的区域。Adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain the second interface, the brightness of the fixation area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-fixation areas; the non-fixation area is the area outside the fixation area in the interface.
结合上述第一方面,在第一种可能的实现方式中,上述检测用户的眼球在界面 中的注视区域,包括:In combination with the first aspect above, in a first possible implementation manner, the detection of the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface includes:
确定用户眼球的注视焦点在界面中对应的焦点区域;Determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the interface;
根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域。Determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area.
结合上述第一种可能的实现方式,在第二种可能的实现方式中,上述根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示或多窗口显示。With reference to the above first possible implementation manner, in the second possible implementation manner, determining the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area includes: determining according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface The gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, and the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
结合上述第二种可能的实现方式,在第三种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示,上述根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:根据焦点区域确定注视区域,注视区域包括焦点区域。In combination with the above-mentioned second possible implementation, in the third possible implementation, the window display type is single-window display, and the user's eyeballs' gaze in the interface is determined according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. The area includes: determining the gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
结合上述第二种可能的实现方式,在第四种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;上述根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:从至少2个窗口区域中获取第一窗口区域,第一窗口区域是至少2个窗口区域中与焦点区域的相交区域最大的窗口区域;将第一窗口区域确定为注视区域。In combination with the second possible implementation above, in the fourth possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; The display type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including: obtaining the first window area from at least two window areas, and the first window area is the window area with the largest intersection area with the focus area among the at least two window areas; The first window area is determined as the gaze area.
结合上述第二种可能的实现方式,在第五种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:确定至少2个窗口区域中各窗口区域与焦点区域的相交区域相等;维持前一周期确定的注视区域和非注视区域不变;或者,从至少2个窗口区域中选择一个非全屏窗口对应的窗口区域作为注视区域。In combination with the second possible implementation above, in the fifth possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; according to the focus area and the current window display of the first interface The type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including: determining that the intersection area between each window area and the focus area in at least two window areas is equal; maintaining the gaze area and non-gazing area determined in the previous cycle; or, from Select a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from at least two window areas as the gaze area.
结合上述第四种可能的实现方式或者第五种可能的实现方式,在第六种可能的实现方式中,多窗口显示包括:单悬浮窗显示,和/或,多悬浮窗显示,和/或,分屏显示,和/或,平行视界显示。In combination with the fourth possible implementation manner or the fifth possible implementation manner above, in a sixth possible implementation manner, the multi-window display includes: displaying a single floating window, and/or displaying multiple floating windows, and/or , split screen display, and/or, parallel horizon display.
结合上述任一种可能的实现方式,在第七种可能的实现方式中,调整界面的显示亮度,包括:获取第一目标亮度,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度。In combination with any of the foregoing possible implementation manners, in a seventh possible implementation manner, adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: acquiring a first target brightness, and adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
结合第七种可能的实现方式,在第八种可能的实现方式中,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度;或者,将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度。In combination with the seventh possible implementation, in the eighth possible implementation, adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness includes: directly adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; or, adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; The brightness of the area fades to the first target brightness.
结合第七种可能的实现方式,在第九种可能的实现方式中,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:获取电源的电量;电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;或者,电量小于第一阈值,不小于第二阈值,按照第二步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长;或者,电量小于第二阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度。In combination with the seventh possible implementation, in the ninth possible implementation, the brightness of the gaze area is adjusted to the first target brightness, including: obtaining the power of the power supply; the power is not less than the first threshold, according to the first step Gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; or, if the power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold , the length of the first step is less than the second step; or, the power is less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
结合第七种可能的实现方式,在第十种可能的实现方式中,调整界面的显示亮度,包括:获取非注视区域的亮度设置策略,按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度。In combination with the seventh possible implementation manner, in the tenth possible implementation manner, adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: obtaining a brightness setting policy of the non-fixation area, and adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting policy.
结合第十种可能的实现方式,在第十一种可能的实现方式中,按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度,包括:根据亮度设置策略确定第二目标亮度,将非注视区域的亮度调整为第二目标亮度。In combination with the tenth possible implementation, in the eleventh possible implementation, adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area according to the brightness setting strategy includes: determining the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjusting the brightness of the non-fixation area is the second target brightness.
结合第十一种可能的实现方式,在第十二种可能的实现方式中,将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:将非注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度;或者,将非注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度。In combination with the eleventh possible implementation manner, in the twelfth possible implementation manner, adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness includes: directly adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness; or, adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness; The brightness of the gaze area fades to the target brightness.
结合第十一种可能的实现方式,在第十三种可能的实现方式中,将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:获取电源的电量;电量不小于第三阈值,按照第三步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;或者,电量小于第三阈值,不小于第四阈值,按照第四步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;第三阈值大于第四阈值,第三步长小于第四步长;或者,电量小于第四阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。In combination with the eleventh possible implementation, in the thirteenth possible implementation, adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness includes: obtaining the power of the power supply; the power is not less than the third threshold, according to the third step Gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the target brightness; or, if the power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the target brightness according to the fourth step length; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third The step length is less than the fourth step length; or, the battery power is less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
结合第十种可能的实现方式,在第十四种可能的实现方式中,亮度设置策略包括:非注视区域划分为若干个子区域,按照若干个子区域与注视区域的距离从小到大的顺序,子区域的亮度依次降低,子区域的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,按照非注视区域的像素点与注视区域的边界线的最小距离从小到大的顺序,像素点的亮度依次降低,非注视区域的像素点的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,设置非注视区域的亮度为第二目标亮度,第二目标亮度小于第一目标亮度。In combination with the tenth possible implementation, in the fourteenth possible implementation, the brightness setting strategy includes: dividing the non-focused area into several sub-areas, and according to the order of the distances between the several sub-areas and the focused area from small to large, the sub-areas The brightness of the area decreases in turn, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or, according to the order of the minimum distance between the pixel point of the non-focus area and the boundary line of the focus area, the brightness of the pixel points decreases sequentially, and the non-focus area The maximum luminance of the pixels in the gazing area is less than or equal to the first target luminance; or, the luminance of the non-gazing area is set as the second target luminance, and the second target luminance is smaller than the first target luminance.
结合上述任一种可能的实现方式,在第十五种可能的实现方式中,调整界面的显示亮度,包括:在界面上增加显示透明蒙版层;设置透明蒙版层的颜色和/或透明度,使得注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度。In combination with any of the above possible implementations, in a fifteenth possible implementation, adjusting the display brightness of the interface includes: adding a transparent mask layer to the interface; setting the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer , so that the brightness of the focused area is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-focused areas.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第三方面任一项所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when it runs on a computer, the computer executes the program described in any one of the third aspect. method.
第五方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,用于执行第一方面所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a computer program for executing the method described in the first aspect when the computer program is executed by a computer.
在一种可能的设计中,第五方面中的程序可以全部或者部分存储在与处理器封装在一起的存储介质上,也可以部分或者全部存储在不与处理器封装在一起的存储器上。In a possible design, all or part of the program in the fifth aspect may be stored on a storage medium packaged with the processor, or part or all may be stored on a memory not packaged with the processor.
附图说明Description of drawings
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案,下面将对实施例中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其它的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the following will briefly introduce the accompanying drawings that need to be used in the embodiments. Obviously, the accompanying drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present application. Those of ordinary skill in the art can also obtain other drawings based on these drawings without any creative effort.
图1A为本申请实施例电子设备的结构示意图;FIG. 1A is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图1B为本申请实施例电子设备的软件结构示意图;FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the software structure of the electronic device of the embodiment of the present application;
图2A为本申请实施例屏幕坐标系建立方法示意图;FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a method for establishing a screen coordinate system in an embodiment of the present application;
图2B为本申请实施例单窗口显示场景下的界面示意图;FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of the interface in the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图2C为本申请实施例单悬浮窗场景下的界面示意图;Fig. 2C is a schematic diagram of the interface in the scenario of a single floating window in the embodiment of the present application;
图2D为本申请实施例多悬浮窗场景下的界面示意图;FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram of the interface in the multi-floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application;
图2E为本申请实施例分屏显示场景下的界面示意图;FIG. 2E is a schematic diagram of the interface in the split-screen display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图2F为本申请实施例平行视界显示场景下的界面示意图;FIG. 2F is a schematic diagram of the interface in the parallel horizon display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例单窗口显示场景下注视区域确定方法示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a method for determining a gaze area in a single-window display scene according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4A为本申请实施例非注视区域划分子区域的方法示意图;FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a method for dividing a non-focused region into subregions according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4B为本申请实施例单窗口显示场景下注视区域发生变化时的场景示意图;FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the scene when the gaze area changes under the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请界面显示方法一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 5 is a flowchart of an embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图6A为本申请实施例注视区域重叠示意图;FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of overlapping gaze areas according to an embodiment of the present application;
图6B为本申请实施例单窗口显示场景下界面显示效果示意图;FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the single-window display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例单悬浮窗场景下的界面示意图;Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the interface in the single floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application;
图8A为本申请界面显示方法再一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 8A is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图8B为本申请实施例单悬浮窗场景下界面显示效果示意图;Fig. 8B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the single floating window scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例多悬浮窗场景下的界面示意图;Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the interface in the multi-floating window scenario of the embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例多悬浮窗场景下界面显示效果示意图;Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the multi-floating window scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图11A为本申请实施例分屏显示场景下的界面示意图;FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram of an interface in a split-screen display scenario according to an embodiment of the present application;
图11B为本申请实施例分屏显示场景下界面显示效果示意图;FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the split-screen display scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图12A为本申请实施例平行视界场景下的界面示意图;Fig. 12A is a schematic diagram of the interface in the parallel view scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图12B为本申请实施例平行视界场景下界面显示效果示意图;Fig. 12B is a schematic diagram of the interface display effect in the parallel view scene of the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的软件结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请界面显示方法又一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 14 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图15为本申请界面显示方法又一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 15 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图16为本申请界面显示方法又一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 16 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图17为本申请界面显示方法又一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 17 is a flowchart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图18为本申请界面显示方法又一个实施例的流程图;Fig. 18 is a flow chart of another embodiment of the interface display method of the present application;
图19为本申请界面显示装置一个实施例的结构示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of an interface display device of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。The terms used in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain specific embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
现有的实现方案中,针对屏幕耗电的场景,常见的智能省电方式有屏幕亮度自动调节、自动灭屏等。但是,这些省电方式下,如果屏幕亮度降低过多,用户很难看清屏幕上的显示内容,降低用户的观看体验,如果屏幕亮度降低的很少,对于电子设备的省电效果有限。In the existing implementation schemes, for scenarios where the screen consumes power, common intelligent power-saving methods include automatic adjustment of screen brightness and automatic screen off. However, in these power-saving modes, if the brightness of the screen is reduced too much, it is difficult for the user to see the displayed content on the screen, which reduces the viewing experience of the user; if the brightness of the screen is reduced slightly, the power-saving effect on electronic devices is limited.
为此,本申请提出一种界面显示方法和电子设备,既保证用户的观看体验,又具有相对更好的省电效果。For this reason, the present application proposes an interface display method and an electronic device, which not only guarantee the user's viewing experience, but also have a relatively better power saving effect.
具体的,本申请界面显示方法中,获取用户的眼球在屏幕上的注视区域,注视区域按照正常亮度显示,从而保证用户的观看体验,并且,注视区域之外的非注视区域 的亮度低于上述正常亮度,从而达到省电目的。Specifically, in the interface display method of this application, the gaze area of the user's eyeballs on the screen is obtained, and the gaze area is displayed at normal brightness, thereby ensuring the user's viewing experience, and the brightness of the non-gazing area outside the gaze area is lower than the above-mentioned Normal brightness, so as to achieve the purpose of power saving.
进而,非注视区域的亮度可以调节到相对很低的程度,甚至达到屏幕的最低亮度,从而达到更好的省电效果。Furthermore, the brightness of the non-watching area can be adjusted to a relatively low level, even reaching the lowest brightness of the screen, so as to achieve a better power saving effect.
本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于电子设备,例如可以是:手机,PAD,PC,电视,大屏,车载设备,等等。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to electronic devices, such as mobile phones, PADs, PCs, TVs, large screens, vehicle-mounted devices, and so on.
示例性的,图1A示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。Exemplarily, FIG. 1A shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present application does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (mobile industry processor interface, MIPI), general-purpose input and output (general-purpose input/output, GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (subscriber identity module, SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (serial data line, SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flashlight, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 may be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 may be coupled to the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communication, sampling, quantizing and encoding the analog signal. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example: the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to realize the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interface includes camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through the CSI interface to realize the shooting function of the electronic device 100 . The processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to realize the display function of the electronic device 100 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193 , the display screen 194 , the wireless communication module 160 , the audio module 170 , the sensor module 180 and so on. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, specifically, it can be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100 , and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones and play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules shown in the embodiment of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB 接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. Wherein, the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 can receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive a wireless charging input through a wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 is charging the battery 142 , it can also provide power for electronic devices through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives the input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 to provide power for the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be disposed in the processor 110 . In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be set in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be set in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be set in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Wherein, the modulator is used for modulating the low-frequency baseband signal to be transmitted into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator sends the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low-frequency baseband signal is passed to the application processor after being processed by the baseband processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio equipment (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194 . In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In some other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent from the processor 110, and be set in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency-modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (general packet radio service, GPRS), code division multiple access (code division multiple access, CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR techniques, etc. The GNSS may include a global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), a global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), a Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), a quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light‐emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active‐matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light‐emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro‐oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active‐matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light emitting diode (flex light‐emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro‐oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193 , the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used for processing the data fed back by the camera 193 . For example, when taking a picture, open the shutter, the light is transmitted to the photosensitive element of the camera through the lens, and the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the photosensitive element of the camera transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be located in the camera 193 .
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其 他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the energy of the frequency point.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. The electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, for example: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By referring to the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process input information and continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 100 can be realized through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement a data storage function. Such as saving music, video and other files in the external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,和/或存储在设置于处理器中的存储器的指令,执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。The internal memory 121 may be used to store computer-executable program codes including instructions. The internal memory 121 may include an area for storing programs and an area for storing data. Wherein, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required by a function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.) and the like. The storage data area can store data created during the use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) and the like. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include a high-speed random access memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (universal flash storage, UFS) and the like. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal. The audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be set in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. Electronic device 100 can listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 receives a call or a voice message, the receiver 170B can be placed close to the human ear to receive the voice.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a phone call or sending a voice message, the user can put his mouth close to the microphone 170C to make a sound, and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may also implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In some other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and realize directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口, 美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be a USB interface 130, or a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如阻抗式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. In some embodiments, pressure sensor 180A may be disposed on display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, and capacitive pressure sensors. A capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates with conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, an instruction to view short messages is executed. When a touch operation whose intensity is greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the icon of the short message application, the instruction of creating a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of the electronic device 100 around three axes (ie, x, y and z axes) may be determined by the gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 100, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude based on the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a clamshell machine, the electronic device 100 can detect opening and closing of the clamshell according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Furthermore, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. The electronic device 100 may measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may use the distance sensor 180F for distance measurement to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it may be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user is holding the electronic device 100 close to the ear to make a call, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in leather case mode, automatic unlock and lock screen in pocket mode.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket, so as to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to implement a temperature treatment strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds the threshold, the electronic device 100 may reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J, so as to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the electronic device 100 from being shut down abnormally due to the low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。The touch sensor 180K is also called "touch device". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the position of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human pulse and receive the blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the vocal part acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like. The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 can receive key input and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The motor 191 can be used for incoming call vibration prompts, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations applied to different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) may correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 may also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations acting on different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡, Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected and separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the multiple cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calling and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 adopts an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。具体可以为安卓系统、鸿蒙系统等等。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture. Specifically, it can be Android system, Hongmeng system and so on.
本申请实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The embodiment of the present application takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
图1B是本申请实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。FIG. 1B is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present application.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, which are respectively the application program layer, the application program framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer from top to bottom.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can consist of a series of application packages.
如图1B所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息等应用程序。As shown in FIG. 1B, the application package may include application programs such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, and short message.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图1B所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Fig. 1B, the application framework layer may include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make it accessible to applications. Said data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phonebook, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. The view system can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide communication functions of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables the application to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify the download completion, message reminder, etc. The notification manager can also be a notification that appears on the top status bar of the system in the form of a chart or scroll bar text, such as a notification of an application running in the background, or a notification that appears on the screen in the form of a dialog window. For example, prompting text information in the status bar, issuing a prompt sound, vibrating the electronic device, and flashing the indicator light, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core library and virtual machine. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library consists of two parts: one part is the function function that the java language needs to call, and the other part is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application program layer and the application program framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple function modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of various commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing, etc.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer includes at least a display driver, a camera driver, an audio driver, and a sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 will be exemplarily described below in conjunction with capturing and photographing scenes.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, a corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into original input events (including touch coordinates, time stamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored at the kernel level. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer, and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Take the touch operation as a touch click operation, and the control corresponding to the click operation is the control of the camera application icon as an example. The camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
为了便于理解,本申请以下实施例将以具有图1A和图1B所示结构的电子设备为例,结合附图和应用场景,对本申请实施例提供的方法进行具体说明。For ease of understanding, the following embodiments of the present application will take the electronic device with the structure shown in FIG. 1A and FIG. 1B as an example, and describe the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application in detail in combination with the drawings and application scenarios.
本申请实施例所称之界面是指屏幕上显示的与用户进行交互的可视界面。界面中可以包括多个窗口。The interface referred to in the embodiment of the present application refers to a visual interface displayed on a screen to interact with a user. Multiple windows can be included in the interface.
本申请实施例所称之窗口是屏幕上与一个应用程序相对应的用户界面区域,是用户与产生该窗口的应用之间进行交互的可视界面。每当用户在电子设备中启动某一应用,应用就创建并显示一个窗口;当用户操作窗口中的控件时,应用会作出相应反应。每个应用可以在屏幕上同时显示一个或者多个窗口。The window referred to in the embodiment of the present application is a user interface area corresponding to an application program on the screen, and is a visual interface for interaction between the user and the application generating the window. Whenever a user starts an application in an electronic device, the application creates and displays a window; when the user operates controls in the window, the application reacts accordingly. Each application can display one or more windows on the screen at the same time.
本申请实施例中将电子设备的屏幕的完整显示区域成为屏幕显示区域。In the embodiment of the present application, the complete display area of the screen of the electronic device is referred to as the screen display area.
本申请实施例中将显示区域是屏幕显示区域的窗口称为全屏窗口;显示区域小于等屏幕显示区域的窗口称为非全屏窗口。In the embodiment of the present application, a window whose display area is a screen display area is called a full-screen window; a window whose display area is smaller than an equal-screen display area is called a non-full-screen window.
上述的窗口可以具有边界参数,用于记录窗口的边界线的位置。举例来说,以电子设备是PAD为例,如图2A所示,可以以屏幕左上角的顶点为原点O,水平向左的屏幕边沿为x轴,竖直向下的屏幕边沿为y轴建立坐标系,则屏幕中的每个像 素可以具有(x,y)的坐标,x用于表示像素所在行,y用于表示像素所在列;相应的,窗口的边界线也可以通过该坐标系中的坐标来标识。举例来说,图2A中所示的窗口1的边界参数可以为(x1,y1,x2,y2),(x1,y1)是窗口1的左上角顶点A的坐标,(x2,y2)是窗口1的右下角顶点C的坐标。The above-mentioned window may have a boundary parameter, which is used to record the position of the boundary line of the window. For example, taking the electronic device as a PAD as an example, as shown in Figure 2A, the vertex in the upper left corner of the screen can be used as the origin O, the horizontal left screen edge is the x-axis, and the vertically downward screen edge is the y-axis. coordinate system, each pixel on the screen can have (x, y) coordinates, x is used to indicate the row where the pixel is located, and y is used to indicate the column where the pixel is located; correspondingly, the boundary line of the window can also pass through the coordinate system coordinates to identify. For example, the boundary parameter of window 1 shown in Fig. 2A can be (x1, y1, x2, y2), (x1, y1) is the coordinate of vertex A at the upper left corner of window 1, (x2, y2) is the window The coordinates of the lower right vertex C of 1.
通过窗口的上述边界参数也可以确定窗口是全屏窗口或者非全屏窗口,举例来说,如果屏幕分辨率为1920*1080,那么如果窗口的边界参数是(0,0,1920,1080),那么该窗口是全屏窗口,否则是非全屏窗口。The above boundary parameters of the window can also determine whether the window is a full-screen window or a non-full-screen window. For example, if the screen resolution is 1920*1080, then if the window's boundary parameters are (0,0,1920,1080), then the The window is a full-screen window, otherwise it is a non-full-screen window.
以下实施例中以电子设备是PAD为例。In the following embodiments, the electronic device is a PAD as an example.
本申请实施例界面显示方法可以适用于单窗口显示场景以及多窗口显示场景。The interface display method in the embodiment of the present application may be applicable to single-window display scenarios and multi-window display scenarios.
单窗口显示场景是指:屏幕上仅显示一个窗口,该窗口为全屏窗口,例如图2B所示,界面是PAD的桌面,仅包括一个全屏窗口201,PAD的桌面是该全屏窗口中显示的画面。The single-window display scene refers to: only one window is displayed on the screen, and this window is a full-screen window, such as shown in Figure 2B, the interface is the desktop of the PAD, including only a full-screen window 201, and the desktop of the PAD is the picture displayed in the full-screen window .
多窗口显示场景是指:界面中包括至少2个窗口,每个窗口可以是全屏窗口或者非全屏窗口。The multi-window display scene means that the interface includes at least two windows, and each window can be a full-screen window or a non-full-screen window.
多窗口显示场景具体可以包括:单悬浮窗显示、多悬浮窗显示、分屏显示、平行视界显示等。The multi-window display scenarios may specifically include: single floating window display, multiple floating window display, split-screen display, parallel horizon display, and the like.
悬浮窗是在一个窗口上方悬浮、且可移动的窗口,悬浮窗一般是非全屏窗口。A floating window is a movable window floating above a window, and the floating window is generally a non-full-screen window.
如果一个全屏窗口上方仅有一个悬浮窗,可以称为单悬浮窗显示场景,例如图2C所示,界面中包括:全屏窗口201和悬浮窗202,全屏窗口201中显示有PAD的桌面,悬浮窗202中显示有应用1的界面;如果一个全屏窗口上方有2个或者2个以上的悬浮窗,可以称为多悬浮窗显示场景,例如图2D所示,界面包括全屏窗口201、第一悬浮窗203和第二悬浮窗204,全屏窗口201中显示有PAD的桌面,第一悬浮窗203中显示有应用1的界面,第二悬浮窗204中显示有应用2的界面。If there is only one floating window above a full-screen window, it can be called a single floating window display scene, such as shown in FIG. The interface of application 1 is displayed in 202; if there are 2 or more floating windows above a full-screen window, it can be called a multi-suspension window display scene, as shown in Figure 2D for example, the interface includes a full-screen window 201, the first floating window 203 and the second floating window 204 , the desktop of the PAD is displayed in the full screen window 201 , the interface of the application 1 is displayed in the first floating window 203 , and the interface of the application 2 is displayed in the second floating window 204 .
需要说明的是,悬浮窗的大小一般可以人为调整;多个悬浮窗显示时不同悬浮窗的大小可以相同或不同。It should be noted that the size of the floating window can generally be adjusted manually; when multiple floating windows are displayed, the sizes of different floating windows can be the same or different.
需要说明的是,多个悬浮窗之间可以不存在重叠部分,也可以部分或者全部重叠。It should be noted that there may be no overlapping portion among the multiple floating windows, and some or all of them may overlap.
分屏显示是指在屏幕上显示多个应用的窗口,窗口之间互不重叠,多个应用的窗口占用屏幕的整个显示区域,例如图2E所示,以分屏显示应用1界面的窗口和应用2界面的窗口为例,具体的,界面中包括:第一分屏窗口205和第二分屏窗口206,第一分屏窗口205中显示应用1的界面,第二分屏窗口206中显示应用2的界面。Split-screen display refers to displaying windows of multiple applications on the screen. The windows do not overlap each other. The windows of multiple applications occupy the entire display area of the screen. For example, as shown in Figure 2E, the windows of the application 1 interface and the The window of the application 2 interface is taken as an example. Specifically, the interface includes: a first split-screen window 205 and a second split-screen window 206, the first split-screen window 205 displays the interface of application 1, and the second split-screen window 206 displays App 2's interface.
需要说明的是,分屏显示场景下相邻两个窗口之间具有公共边界线21。公共边界线一般可以人为调整位置,从而改变两个相邻窗口的显示区域。It should be noted that there is a common boundary line 21 between two adjacent windows in the split-screen display scene. Generally, the position of the common boundary line can be adjusted artificially, thereby changing the display area of two adjacent windows.
平行视界显示是指屏幕上显示同一应用的多个窗口,窗口之间互不重叠,多个窗口占用屏幕的整个显示区域,例如图2F所述,以2个平行视界窗口显示应用1的两个界面为例,其中,界面中包括第一平行视界窗口207和第二平行视界窗口208,第一平行视界窗口207中显示应用1的界面1,第二平行视界窗口208中显示应用1的界面2。Parallel horizon display means that multiple windows of the same application are displayed on the screen. The windows do not overlap each other, and multiple windows occupy the entire display area of the screen. For example, as shown in Figure 2F, two parallel horizon windows are used to display two Take the interface as an example, where the interface includes a first parallel horizon window 207 and a second parallel horizon window 208, the first parallel horizon window 207 displays interface 1 of application 1, and the second parallel horizon window 208 displays interface 2 of application 1 .
需要说明的是,平行视界显示场景下相邻两个窗口之间具有公共边界线22。边界线一般可以人为调整位置,从而改变两个相邻窗口的显示区域。It should be noted that there is a common boundary line 22 between two adjacent windows in the parallel horizon display scene. Generally, the position of the boundary line can be adjusted artificially, thereby changing the display area of two adjacent windows.
以下分别说明每种显示场景下本申请界面显示方法的实现。The implementation of the interface display method of the present application under each display scenario will be described separately below.
本申请实施例提供单窗口显示场景下的界面显示方法,如图2B所示,该场景下,屏幕中显示的界面仅包括一个全屏窗口201。The embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a single-window display scenario. As shown in FIG. 2B , in this scenario, the interface displayed on the screen includes only one full-screen window 201 .
现有技术中界面的显示亮度是根据屏幕的亮度参数确定的,因此,界面具有一个显示亮度。In the prior art, the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the interface has a display brightness.
而在本申请实施例界面显示方法中,电子设备可以通过电子设备的前置摄像头拍摄用户的视频图像,根据视频图像检测用户眼球的注视焦点,如果注视焦点位于屏幕上,确定注视焦点在屏幕上对应的区域(以下称为焦点区域),根据焦点区域来确定用户的注视区域和非注视区域,为用户的注视区域和非注视区域设置不同的显示亮度。However, in the interface display method of the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can take a video image of the user through the front camera of the electronic device, and detect the gaze focus of the user's eyes according to the video image. If the gaze focus is on the screen, determine that the gaze focus is on the screen. For the corresponding area (hereinafter referred to as the focus area), the user's gaze area and non-gazing area are determined according to the focus area, and different display brightnesses are set for the user's gaze area and non-gazing area.
根据焦点区域确定用户的注视区域时,注视区域包括焦点区域,可选地,注视区域大于焦点区域。例如,可以预设注视区域的尺寸,根据焦点区域和预设尺寸确定注视区域。When determining the gaze area of the user according to the focus area, the gaze area includes the focus area, and optionally, the gaze area is larger than the focus area. For example, the size of the gaze area can be preset, and the gaze area is determined according to the focus area and the preset size.
举例来说,假设焦点区域是一个矩形,注视区域也是一个矩形,可以以焦点区域的中心点作为注视区域的中心点,按照预设的长度和宽度确定一个矩形区域作为注视区域。例如图3所示,焦点区域300是一个矩形,注视区域301也是一个矩形,两个矩形的中心点均为点O1。For example, assuming that the focus area is a rectangle and the gaze area is also a rectangle, the center point of the focus area can be used as the center point of the gaze area, and a rectangular area with a preset length and width can be determined as the gaze area. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 , the focus area 300 is a rectangle, and the gaze area 301 is also a rectangle, and the center points of both rectangles are point O1 .
在确定用户的注视区域后,界面被划分为注视区域和非注视区域两部分,例如图3所示,界面30包括:注视区域301和非注视区域302。After the user's gaze area is determined, the interface is divided into two parts: a gaze area and a non-gazing area. For example, as shown in FIG. 3 , the interface 30 includes: a gaze area 301 and a non-gazing area 302 .
注视区域301的显示亮度可以高于非注视区域302部分或者全部区域的显示亮度。The display brightness of the gazing area 301 may be higher than the display brightness of some or all of the non-gazing area 302 .
以注视区域301的显示亮度高于非注视区域302的显示亮度为例。Take the display brightness of the attention area 301 higher than the display brightness of the non-attention area 302 as an example.
注视区域301的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,也即按照正常亮度显示。The display brightness of the gaze area 301 may be determined according to brightness parameters of the screen, that is, displayed according to normal brightness.
非注视区域302可以设置同一显示亮度,也可以按照区域甚至像素设置不同的显示亮度,只要设置的显示亮度低于注视区域301的显示亮度即可。以下举例说明非注视区域302的显示亮度的可能设置方式:The same display brightness can be set for the non-watching area 302 , or different display brightness can be set for each area or even pixel, as long as the set display brightness is lower than that of the watching area 301 . The following examples illustrate possible ways of setting the display brightness of the non-watching area 302:
在第一种可能的实现方式中,非注视区域302可以使用同一亮度显示,该亮度低于注视区域301的亮度,最低可至像素的最低显示亮度。In a first possible implementation manner, the non-attention area 302 can be displayed with the same brightness, which is lower than the brightness of the attention area 301 , and can be as low as the lowest display brightness of the pixel.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,非注视区域302中可以划分子区域,各子区域的亮度低于注视区域301的亮度,且,至少2个子区域的亮度不同。例如,可以以子区域与注视区域301中心点重合,且子区域的边界线与注视区域301对应的边界线距离为预设数值为原则,对非注视区域302进行子区域的划分,从而得到若干个子区域,子区域的亮度可以以注视区域301的亮度为基准,按照距离注视区域301从近到远依次降低,例如图4A中以划分为3个子区域1~3为例,假设注视区域301 的亮度为a1,则子区域1的亮度可以为a2,子区域2的亮度可以为a3,子区域3的亮度可以为a4,a1>a2>a3>a4。可选地,a4可以是像素的最低显示亮度。In a second possible implementation manner, the non-gazing area 302 may be divided into sub-areas, the brightness of each sub-area is lower than that of the gazing area 301, and at least two sub-areas have different brightnesses. For example, it is possible to divide the non-focus area 302 into sub-areas based on the principle that the sub-area coincides with the center point of the attention area 301, and the boundary line of the sub-area and the corresponding boundary line distance of the attention area 301 are preset values, thereby obtaining several sub-regions, the brightness of the sub-regions can be based on the brightness of the attention region 301, and decrease in order according to the distance from the attention region 301 from near to far. For example, in FIG. If the brightness is a1, the brightness of the sub-region 1 may be a2, the brightness of the sub-region 2 may be a3, and the brightness of the sub-region 3 may be a4, a1>a2>a3>a4. Optionally, a4 may be the minimum display brightness of the pixel.
在第三种可能的实现方式中,按照非注视区域302中像素与注视区域301的最近边界线之间的距离从近到远逐渐降低非注视区域302中像素的显示亮度。该实现方法可以认为是将第二种可能的实现方式中子区域划分的粒度从预设数值(多个像素)降低至1个像素。In a third possible implementation manner, the display brightness of the pixels in the non-attention area 302 is gradually reduced according to the distance between the pixels in the non-attention area 302 and the closest boundary line of the attention area 301 from near to far. This implementation method can be regarded as reducing the granularity of sub-region division in the second possible implementation manner from a preset value (multiple pixels) to 1 pixel.
在第四种可能的实现方式中,由于上述三种可能的实现方式的耗电存在差异,因此,可以基于电子设备剩余电量的不同使用不同亮度设置方式为非注视区域设置显示亮度。举例来说,当电量高于第一数值(例如20%)时,非注视区域302的亮度依照第二种可能的实现方式设置,也即依照距离注视区域从近到远依次变暗,例如非注视区域302划分为3个子区域,按照距离注视区域的远近,亮度分别为注视区域亮度的75%、50%、0%;当电量不高于第一数值(例如20%),高于第二数值(例如10%)时,非注视区域302的亮度依照第三种可能的实现方式设置,非注视区域中像素的亮度依照距离注视区域边界线的远近逐渐变暗;当电量不高于第二数值(例如10%)时,非注视区域302的亮度直接变为0。In the fourth possible implementation, since the power consumption of the above three possible implementations is different, different brightness setting methods may be used to set the display brightness for the non-gazing area based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device. For example, when the battery power is higher than the first value (for example, 20%), the brightness of the non-gazing area 302 is set according to the second possible implementation mode, that is, it is darkened sequentially according to the distance from the gazing area from near to far, such as non-gazing area 302. The gazing area 302 is divided into 3 sub-areas. According to the distance from the gazing area, the brightness is respectively 75%, 50%, and 0% of the gazing area brightness; When the numerical value (such as 10%), the brightness of the non-gazing area 302 is set according to the third possible implementation mode, the brightness of the pixels in the non-gazing area gradually becomes darker according to the distance from the boundary line of the watching area; when the power is not higher than the second When the numerical value (for example, 10%) is set, the brightness of the non-attention area 302 becomes 0 directly.
基于以上的亮度设置方式,在焦点区域随着用户眼球的移动而变化时,界面中的注视区域也随之发生变化,相应的,注视区域变化过程中覆盖的区域的显示亮度随之发生变化,该变化可能是亮度变大也可能是亮度变小。Based on the brightness setting method above, when the focus area changes with the movement of the user's eyeballs, the gaze area in the interface also changes accordingly. Correspondingly, the display brightness of the area covered during the gaze area change changes accordingly. This change may be an increase in brightness or a decrease in brightness.
举例来说,例如图4B所示,随着焦点区域300从虚线所示位置启动至实线所示位置,界面30中注视区域301从虚线所示的位置1移动至实线所示的位置2,如果预设注视区域的显示亮度为100,非注视区域的显示亮度为0,那么,其中区域401的显示亮度从0变化为100,区域402的显示亮度从100变化为0。本申请实施例在实现上述显示亮度的变化时,可以直接从原亮度(变化前亮度)变化为目标亮度(变化后亮度),也可以从原亮度渐变为目标亮度。举例来说:For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, as the focus area 300 is activated from the position shown by the dotted line to the position shown by the solid line, the gaze area 301 in the interface 30 moves from position 1 shown by the dotted line to position 2 shown by the solid line. , if the display brightness of the preset fixation area is 100, and the display brightness of the non-watching area is 0, then the display brightness of area 401 changes from 0 to 100, and the display brightness of area 402 changes from 100 to 0. In the embodiments of the present application, when realizing the change of the above-mentioned display brightness, the original brightness (before the change) may be directly changed to the target brightness (after the change), or the original brightness may be gradually changed to the target brightness. for example:
区域402的显示亮度从100变化为0时,可以直接从100变为0,或者,也可以按照预设渐变步长从100渐变至0,渐变步长本申请实施例不作限定,例如渐变步长为25,则区域402的显示亮度按照以下方式渐变至0:100、75、50、25、0,渐变步长为50,则区域402的显示亮度按照以下方式渐变至0:100、50、0。需要说明的是,上述直接从100变化为0的亮度调整方式也可以认为是渐变步长为100的亮度渐变方式。When the display brightness of area 402 changes from 100 to 0, it can directly change from 100 to 0, or it can also change from 100 to 0 according to the preset gradient step size. The gradient step size is not limited in the embodiment of this application, for example, the gradient step is 25, then the display brightness of area 402 is gradually changed to 0 in the following way: 100, 75, 50, 25, 0, and the gradient step is 50, then the display brightness of area 402 is gradually changed to 0 in the following way: 100, 50, 0 . It should be noted that the brightness adjustment method directly changing from 100 to 0 can also be regarded as a brightness gradual change method with a gradient step size of 100.
需要说明的是,从用户体验角度来说,渐变步长越小,亮度渐变越柔和,用户体验越好,但是耗电相对越高。It should be noted that from the perspective of user experience, the smaller the gradient step size, the softer the brightness gradient and the better the user experience, but the power consumption is relatively higher.
由于直接变化亮度至目标亮度、渐变式变化亮度到目标亮度等亮度调整方式的耗电存在差异,因此,可以基于电子设备剩余电量的不同使用不同亮度调整方式。延续前述举例,当电量高于20%时,区域402的显示亮度依照渐变步长为25渐变至0,也即亮度从100、75、50、25、0,逐渐变暗;当电量不高于20%,高于10%时,区域402的显示亮度依照渐变步长为50渐变至0,也即从亮度100、50再降低为0,快速变暗;当电量不高于10%时,区域402的显示亮度直接从100变为0,直接变暗。Since there are differences in the power consumption of the brightness adjustment methods such as directly changing the brightness to the target brightness and gradually changing the brightness to the target brightness, different brightness adjustment methods can be used based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device. Continuing the above example, when the power level is higher than 20%, the display brightness of the area 402 is gradually changed to 0 according to the gradient step size of 25, that is, the brightness gradually becomes darker from 100, 75, 50, 25, and 0; when the power level is not higher than 20%, when it is higher than 10%, the display brightness of area 402 will gradually change to 0 according to the gradient step size of 50, that is, from brightness 100, 50 and then decrease to 0, and quickly become dark; when the power is not higher than 10%, the area 402 will The display brightness of 402 changes directly from 100 to 0, directly dimming.
基于以上图4A~图4B所示的场景,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图5所示,该方法可以包括:Based on the scenarios shown in FIGS. 4A to 4B above, this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in FIG. 5 , the method may include:
步骤501:获取用户的视频图像,根据视频图像检测到用户眼球的注视焦点位于屏幕上,计算注视焦点在屏幕上对应的焦点区域。Step 501: Obtain a video image of the user, detect that the gaze focus of the user's eyes is on the screen according to the video image, and calculate the corresponding focal area of the gaze focus on the screen.
可选地,电子设备的屏幕正上方可以设置有摄像头,摄像头可以具有检测用户的眼球注视屏幕事件的功能,如果摄像头检测到用户的眼球注视屏幕事件,可以将该事件上报摄像头驱动,摄像头驱动获取用户的眼球图像,根据眼球图像计算注视焦点在屏幕上对应的焦点区域,将焦点区域发送至处理器。Optionally, a camera may be provided directly above the screen of the electronic device, and the camera may have the function of detecting the user's eyeball gazing at the screen event. If the camera detects the user's eyeball gazing at the screen event, the event may be reported to the camera driver, and the camera driver acquires The eyeball image of the user calculates the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus on the screen according to the eyeball image, and sends the focus area to the processor.
焦点区域可以是一个预设大小的区域,该区域可以是矩形或者圆形等。The focus area may be an area with a preset size, and the area may be a rectangle or a circle.
步骤502:确定当前的窗口显示类型是单窗口显示。Step 502: Determine that the current window display type is single-window display.
步骤503:根据焦点区域确定用户的注视区域,判断用户的注视区域是否发生变化,如果是,执行步骤505,如果否,执行步骤504。Step 503: Determine the gaze area of the user according to the focus area, and determine whether the gaze area of the user changes, if yes, execute step 505, and if not, execute step 504.
其中,注视区域包括焦点区域,具体确定方法可以参考前述相关描述,这里不赘述。Wherein, the gaze area includes a focus area, and for a specific determination method, reference may be made to the foregoing related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.
其中,本申请实施例中获取用户眼球的注视焦点在屏幕上的焦点区域、进而确定注视区域一般是周期性进行的,判断用户的注视区域是否发生变化,可以将本次确定的注视区域与前一次确定的注视区域进行比较,确定注视区域是否发生了变化。Among them, in the embodiment of the present application, the acquisition of the focus area of the focus of the user's eye on the screen, and then the determination of the focus area is generally carried out periodically. To determine whether the user's focus area has changed, the fixation area determined this time can be compared with the previous one. A determined fixation area is compared to determine whether the fixation area has changed.
步骤504:维持注视区域和非注视区域的显示亮度不变,本分支流程结束。Step 504: Keep the display brightness of the fixation area and the non-fixation area unchanged, and the flow of this branch ends.
步骤505:获取变化后注视区域的当前亮度和目标亮度,将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度;获取变化后非注视区域的当前亮度和目标亮度,将变化后非注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度。Step 505: Obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the fixation area after the change, adjust the brightness of the fixation area from the current brightness to the target brightness after the change; obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the non-fixation area after the change, and adjust the brightness of the non-fixation area after the change The brightness is adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness.
其中,将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度时,可以直接将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整为目标亮度,也可以按照某一步长将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度。步长越大,渐变速度越快,直接将注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整为目标亮度的实现方式也可以认为是步长最大,也即步长为目标亮度与当前亮度差值,此时,渐变速度最快。Wherein, when adjusting the brightness of the changed fixation area from the current brightness to the target brightness, the brightness of the changed fixation area can be directly adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness, or the brightness of the changed fixation area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness according to a certain step length. The brightness fades to the target brightness. The larger the step size, the faster the gradient speed. The implementation method of directly adjusting the brightness of the gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness can also be considered as the largest step size, that is, the step size is the difference between the target brightness and the current brightness. At this time, Gradients are fastest.
在一种可能的实现方式中,可以根据电源的电量来使用不同渐变速度将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度。举例来说,预设三种不同渐变速度的亮度调整方式,则,将注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度,可以包括:In a possible implementation manner, different gradient speeds may be used to adjust the brightness of the changed gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the power of the power supply. For example, three brightness adjustment methods with different gradient speeds are preset, then adjusting the brightness of the gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness may include:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度;The battery power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the changed gaze area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the first step;
电量不小于第二阈值,小于第一阈值,按照第二步长将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度;The power is not less than the second threshold, and is less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the changed gaze area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the second step length;
电量小于第二阈值,将变化后注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。If the power is less than the second threshold, the brightness of the gaze area after the change is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长。The first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step.
需要说明的是,如果用户眼球移动速度较慢,例如图6A所示,可能出现变化前的注视区域601与变化后的注视区域602之间存在重叠区域603的情况,此时,重 叠区域603的显示亮度为目标亮度,变化后注视区域602中除重叠区域603之外的区域的显示亮度小于目标亮度,对于此种情况,可以保持重叠区域603的显示亮度不变,将注视区域602中除重叠区域603之外的区域按照上述亮度调整方式调整至目标亮度。It should be noted that if the user's eyeballs move slowly, for example, as shown in FIG. 6A , there may be an overlapping area 603 between the gaze area 601 before the change and the gaze area 602 after the change. At this time, the overlapping area 603 The display brightness is the target brightness. After the change, the display brightness of areas other than the overlapping area 603 in the attention region 602 is less than the target brightness. The areas outside the area 603 are adjusted to the target brightness according to the brightness adjustment method described above.
将变化后非注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度的方法可以参考上述将变化后注视区域的亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度的方法,这里不赘述。需要说明的是,注视区域和非注视区域的亮度调整可以认为是独立的两个处理进程,两者的调整方式可以相同或者不同,亮度的渐变速度可以相同或者不同,本申请实施例不作限定。For the method of adjusting the brightness of the changed non-gaze area from the current brightness to the target brightness, refer to the above-mentioned method of adjusting the brightness of the changed fixation area from the current brightness to the target brightness, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the brightness adjustment of the attention area and the non-attention area can be regarded as two independent processing processes, the adjustment methods of the two can be the same or different, and the gradual change speed of the brightness can be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,如果非注视区域中划分子区域,不同子区域具有不同的亮度,则在调整非注视区域的亮度时,可以将非注视区域重新划分子区域,按照子区域分别进行亮度调整,具体实现可以参考上述非注视区域具有单一亮度时的调整方式,区别仅在于将非注视区域的亮度调整细分为多个子区域的亮度调整,这里不再过多赘述。It should be noted that if the non-focus area is divided into sub-regions, and different sub-regions have different brightness, then when adjusting the brightness of the non-focus area, the non-focus area can be re-divided into sub-regions, and the brightness adjustments are performed according to the sub-regions. The specific implementation can refer to the above-mentioned adjustment method when the non-focus area has a single brightness.
这里,对本申请调整界面中不同区域的显示亮度的可能实现方法进行举例说明。Here, a possible implementation method of adjusting the display brightness of different areas in the interface in the present application is described by way of example.
目前,很多电子设备使用OLED屏幕,OLED屏幕尤其是AMOLED屏幕的屏幕特性是自发光,像素点的颜色越暗,像素点耗电相对越小,尤其是像素点显示黑色时是通过关闭像素点来达成的,此时,像素点耗电最小。本申请实施例中可以利用这一特性,在屏幕显示的界面上叠加一层透明蒙版层,通过调整透明蒙版层的透明度和/或颜色值来调整屏幕显示界面中区域的亮度。At present, many electronic devices use OLED screens. The screen characteristics of OLED screens, especially AMOLED screens, are self-illumination. The darker the color of the pixels, the lower the power consumption of the pixels, especially when the pixels display black. At this time, the power consumption of the pixels is the smallest. In this embodiment of the present application, this feature can be used to overlay a transparent mask layer on the interface displayed on the screen, and adjust the brightness of the area in the screen display interface by adjusting the transparency and/or color value of the transparent mask layer.
在一种实现方式中,透明蒙版层中像素的颜色可以为黑色,用RGB表示为(0,0,0),透明蒙版层中每个像素可以设置不同的透明度,则,屏幕上一个像素a的实际显示颜色是界面上该像素a的颜色与透明蒙版层中该像素a的颜色按照黑色蒙版层的透明度融合后的颜色,实际显示颜色X的计算公式可以为:X=αP+(1-α)Q,其中,α是透明蒙版层的透明度,P是界面中该像素a的颜色,Q是透明蒙版层中该像素a的颜色,如果颜色X用RGB表示为(R3,G3,B3),颜色P用RGB表示为(R1,G1,B1),颜色Q用RGB表示为(R2,G2,B2),上述实际显示颜色X的计算公式可以为R3=αR1+(1-α)R2,G3=αG1+(1-α)G2,B3=αB1+(1-α)B2。透明度越低,像素的实际显示颜色越偏向于黑色。In one implementation, the color of the pixels in the transparent mask layer can be black, expressed as (0,0,0) in RGB, and each pixel in the transparent mask layer can be set to a different transparency, then, a The actual display color of pixel a is the color after the fusion of the color of the pixel a on the interface and the color of the pixel a in the transparent mask layer according to the transparency of the black mask layer. The calculation formula for the actual display color X can be: X=αP+ (1-α)Q, wherein, α is the transparency of the transparent mask layer, P is the color of the pixel a in the interface, and Q is the color of the pixel a in the transparent mask layer, if the color X is expressed as (R3 , G3, B3), the color P is expressed as (R1, G1, B1) with RGB, and the color Q is expressed as (R2, G2, B2) with RGB, the calculation formula of the above-mentioned actual display color X can be R3=αR1+(1- α)R2,G3=αG1+(1-α)G2, B3=αB1+(1-α)B2. The lower the opacity, the more black the actual displayed color of the pixel is.
像素亮度(Pixel Light)Y的计算公式可以为Y=(0.299*R)+(0.587*G)+(0.114*B),RGB值越小,像素亮度越低。通过为上述透明蒙版层可以降低像素的RGB值,进而可以降低像素亮度,通过透明蒙版层中像素的透明度的设置可以调节像素亮度的调整程度。The calculation formula of Pixel Light (Pixel Light) Y can be Y=(0.299*R)+(0.587*G)+(0.114*B), the smaller the RGB value, the lower the pixel brightness. The RGB value of the pixel can be reduced by making the transparent mask layer, and then the brightness of the pixel can be reduced, and the adjustment degree of the pixel brightness can be adjusted by setting the transparency of the pixel in the transparent mask layer.
基于以上原理,如果希望调整界面中某个像素或者某个区域的亮度,只要设置透明蒙版层中对应像素或者区域的透明度,即可以实现。Based on the above principles, if you want to adjust the brightness of a certain pixel or a certain area in the interface, you only need to set the transparency of the corresponding pixel or area in the transparent mask layer, and you can achieve it.
以调整透明度的方式实现界面中像素或区域的亮度调整,在另一种实现方式中,透明蒙版层的透明度可以设置为固定值,通过改变透明蒙版层中像素的RGB值来调整界面中对应像素的亮度,此时,对于上述的公式X=αP+(1-α)Q,α为固定值, 界面中像素a的颜色P不变,蒙版层中像素a的颜色Q变化,则像素a的实际显示颜色X也可以得到调整。基于该原理,如果希望调整界面中某个像素或者某个区域的亮度,只要设置透明蒙版层中对应像素或者区域的颜色值(RGB),即可以实现。Adjust the brightness of pixels or areas in the interface by adjusting the transparency. In another implementation, the transparency of the transparent mask layer can be set to a fixed value, and the RGB value of the pixel in the transparent mask layer can be adjusted to adjust the brightness of the interface. Corresponding to the brightness of the pixel, at this time, for the above-mentioned formula X=αP+(1-α)Q, α is a fixed value, the color P of pixel a in the interface remains unchanged, and the color Q of pixel a in the mask layer changes, then the pixel The actual display color X of a can also be adjusted. Based on this principle, if you want to adjust the brightness of a certain pixel or a certain area in the interface, you only need to set the color value (RGB) of the corresponding pixel or area in the transparent mask layer, and you can achieve it.
基于以上原理,在又一种可能的实现方式中,也可以同时调整透明蒙版层中像素的透明度和颜色值(RGB),来调整界面中对应像素的亮度。基于该原理,如果希望调整界面中某个像素或者某个区域的亮度,只要设置透明蒙版层中对应像素或者区域的透明度和颜色值(RGB),即可以实现。Based on the above principles, in yet another possible implementation manner, the transparency and color value (RGB) of pixels in the transparent mask layer can also be adjusted at the same time to adjust the brightness of corresponding pixels in the interface. Based on this principle, if you want to adjust the brightness of a certain pixel or a certain area in the interface, you only need to set the transparency and color value (RGB) of the corresponding pixel or area in the transparent mask layer, and you can achieve it.
本申请实施例提供单悬浮窗场景下的界面显示方法,单悬浮窗场景如图2C所示,包括全屏窗口201和悬浮窗202。由于存在悬浮窗202,如图7所示,将界面700划分为主窗口区域701和悬浮窗区域702。悬浮窗区域702是指界面中悬浮窗202对应的区域,主窗口区域701是指界面中除悬浮窗区域702之外的区域。The embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a single floating window scenario. The single floating window scenario is shown in FIG. 2C , including a full-screen window 201 and a floating window 202 . Due to the existence of the floating window 202 , as shown in FIG. 7 , the interface 700 is divided into a main window area 701 and a floating window area 702 . The floating window area 702 refers to the area corresponding to the floating window 202 in the interface, and the main window area 701 refers to the area in the interface except the floating window area 702 .
现有技术中屏幕的显示亮度是根据屏幕的亮度参数确定的,因此,主窗口区域701和悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度相同。In the prior art, the display brightness of the screen is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 are the same.
而在本申请实施例界面显示方法中,根据焦点区域是位于主窗口区域701还是位于悬浮窗区域702,来调整主窗口区域701和悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度。However, in the interface display method of the embodiment of the present application, the display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 is adjusted according to whether the focus area is located in the main window area 701 or in the floating window area 702 .
具体的,如果焦点区域位于主窗口区域701中,说明用户正在关注主窗口区域701中显示的内容,主窗口区域701是用户的注视区域,悬浮窗区域702是用户的非注视区域,本申请实施例提供注视区域和非注视区域可能的显示亮度设置方式如下:Specifically, if the focus area is located in the main window area 701, it means that the user is paying attention to the content displayed in the main window area 701. The main window area 701 is the user's gaze area, and the floating window area 702 is the user's non-gazing area. The example provides the possible display brightness settings of the fixation area and the non-attention area as follows:
主窗口区域701和悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度可以相同,具体显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定;或者,The display brightness of the main window area 701 and the floating window area 702 can be the same, and the specific display brightness can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen; or,
为了突出主窗口区域701的显示内容,且降低功率消耗,主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以高于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度;可选地,主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度可以部分或者全部低于主窗口区域701的显示亮度;或者,In order to highlight the display content of the main window area 701 and reduce power consumption, the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be higher than that of the floating window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be based on the brightness parameter of the screen It is determined that the display brightness of the floating window area 702 may be partially or entirely lower than the display brightness of the main window area 701; or,
用户在全屏窗口中使用悬浮窗来显示应用的界面,说明用户对悬浮窗中的显示内容相对更为关注,基于此,且结合降低功率消耗的目的,主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度;可选地,悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以部分或者全部低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度。The user uses the floating window to display the application interface in the full-screen window, indicating that the user is relatively more concerned about the displayed content in the floating window. Based on this, and combined with the purpose of reducing power consumption, the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window. The display brightness of the window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the floating window area 702.
如果焦点区域位于悬浮窗区域702中,说明用户正在关注悬浮窗区域702中显示的内容,悬浮窗区域702是用户的注视区域,主窗口区域701是用户的非注视区域,本申请实施例提供注视区域和非注视区域可能的显示亮度设置方式如下:If the focus area is located in the floating window area 702, it means that the user is paying attention to the content displayed in the floating window area 702. The floating window area 702 is the user's gaze area, and the main window area 701 is the user's non-gazing area. This embodiment of the application provides gaze The possible display brightness settings for regions and non-focus regions are as follows:
主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度;可选地,悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,而主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度。The display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window area 702; optionally, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 can be lower than that of the floating window Display brightness of area 702 .
如果主窗口区域701的显示亮度低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度,主窗口区域701中像素点的显示亮度可以相同或者不同。以下举例说明主窗口区域701的显示亮 度的可能设置方式:If the display brightness of the main window area 701 is lower than that of the floating window area 702, the display brightness of the pixels in the main window area 701 may be the same or different. The following example illustrates the possible setting mode of the display brightness of the main window area 701:
在第一种可能的实现方式中,主窗口区域701可以使用同一显示亮度显示,该显示亮度低于悬浮窗区域702的亮度,最低可至屏幕中像素的最低显示亮度。In a first possible implementation manner, the main window area 701 can be displayed with the same display brightness, which is lower than that of the floating window area 702, and can be as low as the lowest display brightness of pixels in the screen.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,主窗口区域701中可以划分子区域,各子区域的显示亮度低于悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度,且,至少2个子区域的显示亮度不同。具体可以参考图4A所示举例,这里不赘述。In a second possible implementation manner, the main window area 701 may be divided into sub-areas, the display brightness of each sub-area is lower than that of the floating window area 702, and at least two sub-areas have different display brightness. For details, reference may be made to the example shown in FIG. 4A , and details are not described here.
在第三种可能的实现方式中,按照主窗口区域701中像素与悬浮窗区域702的最近边界线之间的距离从近到远逐渐降低主窗口区域701中像素的显示亮度。In a third possible implementation manner, the display brightness of the pixels in the main window area 701 is gradually reduced according to the distance between the pixels in the main window area 701 and the closest boundary line of the floating window area 702 from near to far.
在第四种可能的实现方式中,由于上述三种可能的实现方式的耗电存在差异,因此,可以基于电子设备剩余电量的不同使用不同亮度设置方式为非注视区域设置显示亮度。具体实现可以参考图3所示实施例中的对应描述。In the fourth possible implementation, since the power consumption of the above three possible implementations is different, different brightness setting methods may be used to set the display brightness for the non-gazing area based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device. For specific implementation, reference may be made to the corresponding description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
基于以上的显示亮度设置方式,在焦点区域从主窗口区域701移动至悬浮窗区域702,或者从悬浮窗区域702移动至主窗口区域701时,由于注视区域和非注视区域的切换,主窗口区域701和/或悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度可能会随之发生变化,例如亮度增加或者亮度降低等,在主窗口区域701和/或悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度发生变化时,可以直接从原亮度(变化前亮度)变化为目标亮度(变化后亮度),也可以从原亮度渐变为目标亮度。举例来说,Based on the above display brightness setting method, when the focus area moves from the main window area 701 to the floating window area 702, or from the floating window area 702 to the main window area 701, due to the switching between the gaze area and the non-focus area, the main window area 701 and/or the display brightness of the floating window area 702 may change accordingly, such as brightness increase or brightness decrease, etc. When the display brightness of the main window area 701 and/or floating window area 702 changes, the original brightness (Brightness before change) changes to target brightness (brightness after change), and can also gradually change from original brightness to target brightness. for example,
假设焦点区域从主窗口区域701移动至悬浮窗区域702,焦点区域在主窗口区域701时,主窗口区域701的显示亮度为100,悬浮窗区域702的显示亮度为100,焦点区域移动到悬浮窗区域702后,主窗口区域701的亮度为0,悬浮窗区域702的亮度为100,则,检测到焦点区域位于悬浮窗区域702,主窗口区域的显示亮度需要从100变为0,主窗口区域701的显示亮度可以直接从100变为0,也可以渐变为0,渐变的步长本申请实施例不作限定,例如渐变步长为25,则主窗口区域701的亮度按照以下过程渐变至0:100、75、50、25、0,渐变步长为50,则主窗口区域701的亮度按照以下过程渐变至0:100、50、0。Suppose the focus area moves from the main window area 701 to the floating window area 702. When the focus area is in the main window area 701, the display brightness of the main window area 701 is 100, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 is 100, and the focus area moves to the floating window area 702, the brightness of the main window area 701 is 0, and the brightness of the floating window area 702 is 100, then, if the focus area is detected to be located in the floating window area 702, the display brightness of the main window area needs to be changed from 100 to 0, and the main window area The display brightness of 701 can be directly changed from 100 to 0, or it can be gradually changed to 0. The step size of the gradient is not limited in the embodiment of this application. For example, if the step size of the gradient is 25, the brightness of the main window area 701 is gradually changed to 0 according to the following process: 100, 75, 50, 25, 0, and the gradient step is 50, then the brightness of the main window area 701 is gradually changed to 0: 100, 50, 0 according to the following process.
由于直接变化显示亮度至目标亮度、渐变式变化显示亮度到目标亮度等亮度调整方式的耗电存在差异,因此,可以基于电子设备剩余电量的不同使用不同亮度调整方式。延续前述举例,当电量高于70%时,悬浮窗区域702显示亮度不变,主窗口区域701的显示亮度依照渐变步长为25渐变至0,也即显示亮度从100、75、50、25、到0,逐渐变暗;当电量不高于70%,高于10%时,悬浮窗区域702亮度不变,主窗口区域701的显示亮度渐变步长为50,也即从亮度100、50再降低为0,快速变暗;当电量不高于10%时,悬浮窗区域702亮度不变,主窗口区域701的显示亮度直接从100变为0,直接变暗。Since there are differences in power consumption of brightness adjustment methods such as directly changing the display brightness to the target brightness and gradually changing the display brightness to the target brightness, different brightness adjustment methods can be used based on the difference in the remaining power of the electronic device. Continuing the previous example, when the power is higher than 70%, the display brightness of the floating window area 702 remains unchanged, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 gradually changes to 0 according to the gradient step size of 25, that is, the display brightness changes from 100, 75, 50, 25 , to 0, gradually dimming; when the power is not higher than 70% and higher than 10%, the brightness of the floating window area 702 remains unchanged, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 has a gradient step length of 50, that is, from a brightness of 100 to 50 Then reduce it to 0, and quickly dim; when the power is not higher than 10%, the brightness of the floating window area 702 remains unchanged, and the display brightness of the main window area 701 directly changes from 100 to 0, directly dimming.
基于以上图7所示的场景,本申请实施例提供的界面显示方法例如图8A所示,该方法可以包括:Based on the scenario shown in Figure 7 above, the interface display method provided by the embodiment of the present application is shown in Figure 8A, for example, the method may include:
步骤801:获取用户的视频图像,根据视频图像检测到用户眼球的注视焦点位于屏幕上,计算注视焦点在屏幕上对应的焦点区域。Step 801: Obtain a video image of the user, detect that the gaze focus of the user's eyes is located on the screen according to the video image, and calculate the corresponding focal area of the gaze focus on the screen.
本步骤的实现可以参考步骤501中的对应说明,这里不赘述。For the implementation of this step, reference may be made to the corresponding description in step 501, and details are not repeated here.
步骤802:确定当前的窗口显示类型是单悬浮窗类型。Step 802: Determine that the current window display type is a single-suspended window type.
步骤803:根据焦点区域确定用户的注视区域是否发生变化,如果是,执行步骤805,如果否,执行步骤804。Step 803: Determine whether the gaze area of the user changes according to the focus area, if yes, perform step 805, if not, perform step 804.
注视区域是主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域中焦点区域所在的区域。The gaze area is the area where the focus area is located in the main window area and the floating window area.
确定用户的注视区域是否发生变化,是本次获取到的焦点区域与上一周期获取到的焦点区域是否在同一区域(主窗口区域或者悬浮窗区域)。To determine whether the user's gaze area has changed is whether the focus area acquired this time is in the same area (the main window area or the floating window area) as the focus area acquired in the previous cycle.
对本申请实施例中焦点区域位于主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域中的哪个区域的判断方法进行举例说明。The method for judging which of the main window area and the floating window area the focus area is located in the embodiment of the present application will be described with an example.
在一种可能的实现方式中,可以从焦点区域中选择一个像素点,例如焦点区域的中心点,根据像素点所在的区域(主窗口区域或者悬浮窗区域)来确定用户的注视区域,例如像素点位于主窗口区域,则注视区域是主窗口区域,像素点位于悬浮窗区域,则注视区域是悬浮窗区域。In a possible implementation, a pixel point can be selected from the focus area, such as the center point of the focus area, and the user's gaze area can be determined according to the area where the pixel point is located (the main window area or the floating window area), such as the pixel If the point is located in the main window area, then the focus area is the main window area; if the pixel is located in the floating window area, then the focus area is the floating window area.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,可以计算焦点区域与主窗口区域相交的区域在焦点区域中的占比,如果占比超过50%,则注视区域是主窗口区域,否则注视区域是悬浮窗区域;同理,也可以计算焦点区域与悬浮窗区域相交的区域在焦点区域中的占比,如果占比超过50%,则注视区域是悬浮窗区域,否则注视区域是主窗口区域。In another possible implementation, the proportion of the area where the focus area and the main window area intersect in the focus area can be calculated. If the proportion exceeds 50%, the gaze area is the main window area, otherwise the gaze area is the floating window area; similarly, it is also possible to calculate the proportion of the area where the focus area intersects with the floating window area in the focus area. If the proportion exceeds 50%, the gaze area is the floating window area, otherwise the gaze area is the main window area.
对于像素点位于主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域的边界线、或者上述占比为50%的情况,可以在电子设备中预设处理方式,比如:由于无法确定用户关注的区域,可以维持注视区域和非注视区域不变,也即主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域的显示亮度不变;或者,一般用户对悬浮窗的关注相对更多,可以在该情况下确定注视区域是悬浮窗区域;等等。For the case where the pixel is located on the boundary line between the main window area and the floating window area, or the above ratio is 50%, the processing method can be preset in the electronic device, for example: because the area that the user pays attention to cannot be determined, the gaze area and The non-gazing area remains unchanged, that is, the display brightness of the main window area and the floating window area remains unchanged; or, the general user pays more attention to the floating window, and in this case, it can be determined that the gazing area is the floating window area; and so on.
步骤804:维持主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域的显示亮度不变,本分支流程结束。Step 804: Keep the display brightness of the main window area and the floating window area unchanged, and this branch process ends.
步骤805:获取悬浮窗区域的当前亮度和目标亮度,将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度;获取主窗口区域的当前亮度和目标亮度,将主窗口区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度。Step 805: Obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the floating window area, and adjust the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness; obtain the current brightness and target brightness of the main window area, and adjust the display brightness of the main window area from the current brightness to the target brightness. Adjust to target brightness.
由于步骤803中确定注视区域发生变化,那么悬浮窗区域和主窗口区域均需要进行注视区域与非注视区域之间的切换,例如,悬浮窗区域从注视区域切换为非注视区域,那么主窗口区域就从非注视区域切换为注视区域,反之亦然,注视区域的变化可能带来悬浮窗区域和/或主窗口区域的显示亮度变化,电子设备可以根据注视区域是悬浮窗区域还是主窗口区域来确定两个区域的目标亮度。Since it is determined in step 803 that the gaze area changes, both the floating window area and the main window area need to be switched between the gaze area and the non-focus area. Just switch from the non-gazing area to the gazing area, and vice versa, the change of the gazing area may bring about changes in the display brightness of the floating window area and/or the main window area, and the electronic device can determine whether the gazing area is the floating window area or the main window area. Determine the target brightness for the two regions.
需要说明的是,如果某一区域(主窗口区域或者悬浮窗区域)的当前亮度和目标亮度相同,可以不执行针对于该区域的亮度调整步骤。It should be noted that if the current brightness of a certain area (the main window area or the floating window area) is the same as the target brightness, the brightness adjustment step for this area may not be performed.
其中,将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度时,可以直接将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整为目标亮度,也可以按照某一步长将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度。步长越大,渐变速度越快,直接将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整为目标亮度的实现方式也可以认为是步长最大,也即步长为目标亮度与当前亮度差值,此时,渐变速度最快。Among them, when adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness, the display brightness of the floating window area can be directly adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness, or the display brightness of the floating window area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness according to a certain step length. The brightness fades to the target brightness. The larger the step size, the faster the gradient speed. The implementation method of directly adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness can also be considered as the largest step size, that is, the step size is the difference between the target brightness and the current brightness. When , the gradient speed is the fastest.
在一种可能的实现方式中,可以根据电源的电量来使用不同渐变速度将悬浮窗 区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度。举例来说,预设三种不同渐变速度的亮度调整方式,则,将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度,可以包括:In a possible implementation, the display brightness of the floating window area can be adjusted from the current brightness to the target brightness using different gradient speeds according to the power of the power supply. For example, three brightness adjustment methods with different gradient speeds are preset, then adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness may include:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度;The power is not less than the first threshold, and the display brightness of the floating window area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the first step;
电量不小于第二阈值,小于第一阈值,按照第二步长将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度渐变至目标亮度;The power is not less than the second threshold and less than the first threshold, and the display brightness of the floating window area is gradually changed from the current brightness to the target brightness according to the second step length;
电量小于第二阈值,将悬浮窗区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。If the power is less than the second threshold, the brightness of the floating window area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长。The first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step.
将主窗口区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度的方法可以参考上述将悬浮窗区域的显示亮度从当前亮度调整至目标亮度的方法,这里不赘述。需要说明的是,主窗口区域和悬浮窗区域的亮度调整可以认为是独立的两个处理进程,两者的显示调整方式可以相同或者不同,渐变速度可以相同或者不同,本申请实施例不作限定。For the method of adjusting the display brightness of the main window area from the current brightness to the target brightness, refer to the above-mentioned method of adjusting the display brightness of the floating window area from the current brightness to the target brightness, which will not be repeated here. It should be noted that the brightness adjustment of the main window area and the floating window area can be regarded as two independent processing processes, the display adjustment methods of the two can be the same or different, and the fading speeds can be the same or different, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,如果主窗口区域中划分子区域,不同子区域具有不同的亮度,则在调整主窗口区域的亮度时,可以将主窗口区域按照子区域分别进行亮度调整,具体实现可以参考上述主窗口区域具有单一亮度时的调整方式,区别仅在于将主窗口区域的亮度调整细分为多个子区域的亮度调整,这里不再过多赘述。It should be noted that if the main window area is divided into sub-areas, and different sub-areas have different brightness, when adjusting the brightness of the main window area, you can adjust the brightness of the main window area according to the sub-areas. For specific implementation, please refer to the above The adjustment method when the main window area has a single brightness, the difference is only that the brightness adjustment of the main window area is subdivided into the brightness adjustment of multiple sub-areas, which will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例提供多悬浮窗场景下的界面显示方法,如图2D所示,界面包括全屏窗口201、第一悬浮窗203和第二悬浮窗204,如图9所示,三个窗口将界面900划分为:主窗口区域901、第一悬浮窗区域902以及第二悬浮窗区域903。第一悬浮窗区域902是指界面中第一悬浮窗所在的区域,第二悬浮窗区域903是界面中第二悬浮窗所在的区域,主窗口区域901是指界面中除第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903之外的区域。The embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a scene with multiple floating windows. As shown in FIG. 2D, the interface includes a full-screen window 201, a first floating window 203, and a second floating window 204. As shown in FIG. 900 is divided into: a main window area 901 , a first floating window area 902 and a second floating window area 903 . The first floating window area 902 refers to the area where the first floating window is located in the interface, the second floating window area 903 is the area where the second floating window is located in the interface, and the main window area 901 refers to the area in the interface except the first floating window area 902 and the area outside the second floating window area 903 .
现有技术中界面的显示亮度根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,因此,主窗口区域901、第一悬浮窗区域902以及第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度相同。In the prior art, the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the main window area 901 , the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 are the same.
在本申请实施例界面显示方法中,根据焦点区域位于主窗口区域901、第一悬浮窗区域902以及第二悬浮窗区域903中的哪个区域来调整界面中各个区域的显示亮度。In the interface display method of the embodiment of the present application, the display brightness of each area in the interface is adjusted according to which area the focus area is located in the main window area 901 , the first floating window area 902 , and the second floating window area 903 .
如果焦点区域位于主窗口区域901中,将主窗口区域901确定为用户的注视区域,第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903确定为非注视区域,此时用户正在关注主窗口区域901中显示的内容,本申请实施例提供以下可能的显示亮度设置方式:If the focus area is located in the main window area 901, the main window area 901 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 are determined as non-gazing areas. At this time, the user is focusing on the main window area 901 For the content displayed in , the embodiment of this application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
用户在主窗口中使用悬浮窗来显示应用的界面,说明用户对悬浮窗中的显示内容相对更为关注,但是当前用户正在关注主窗口区域901中显示的内容,因此,无法明确用户当前关注的具体窗口区域,因此,在一种可能的实现方式中,主窗口区 域901、第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以相同,具体显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定;或者,The user uses the floating window to display the interface of the application in the main window, indicating that the user pays more attention to the content displayed in the floating window, but the current user is paying attention to the content displayed in the main window area 901, so it is impossible to know what the user is currently concerned about. The specific window area, therefore, in a possible implementation manner, the display brightness of the main window area 901, the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 may be the same, and the specific display brightness may be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen; or,
为了突出主窗口区域901的显示内容,且降低功率消耗,主窗口区域901的显示亮度可以高于第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度;可选地,主窗口区域901的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以部分或者全部低于主窗口区域901的显示亮度,第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以相同或者不同;或者,In order to highlight the display content of the main window area 901 and reduce power consumption, the display brightness of the main window area 901 can be higher than the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903; optionally, the main window area 901 The display brightness of the screen can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen. The display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 can be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the main window area 901. The first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 902 and the second The display brightness of the floating window area 903 may be the same or different; or,
用户在主窗口中使用悬浮窗来显示应用的界面,说明用户对悬浮窗中的显示内容相对更为关注,基于此,且结合降低功率消耗的目的,主窗口区域901的显示亮度可以低于第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度;可选地,第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,主窗口区域901的显示亮度可以部分或者全部低于悬浮窗区域的显示亮度,第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以相同或者不同。The user uses the floating window to display the interface of the application in the main window, indicating that the user pays more attention to the displayed content in the floating window. Based on this, and combined with the purpose of reducing power consumption, the display brightness of the main window area 901 can be lower than that The display brightness of a floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903; optionally, the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 can be determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 901 The brightness may be partially or completely lower than the display brightness of the floating window area, and the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 903 may be the same or different.
需要说明的是,在具体实现中,基于不同的实现目的,还可能存在其他可能的显示亮度设置方法,例如将主窗口区域901和第一悬浮窗区域902设置为同一显示亮度,第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度低于上述两个区域的显示亮度,等等,这里不再一一赘述。It should be noted that, in a specific implementation, there may be other possible display brightness setting methods based on different realization purposes, for example, setting the main window area 901 and the first floating window area 902 to the same display brightness, and setting the second floating window area 901 to the same display brightness. The display brightness of the region 903 is lower than the display brightness of the above two regions, etc., which will not be repeated here.
如果焦点区域位于第一悬浮窗区域902中,将第一悬浮窗区域902确定为用户的注视区域,主窗口区域901和第二悬浮窗区域903确定为非注视区域,此时用户正在关注第一悬浮窗区域902中显示的内容,本申请实施例提供以下可能的显示亮度设置方式:If the focus area is located in the first floating window area 902, the first floating window area 902 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the main window area 901 and the second floating window area 903 are determined as non-gazing areas. At this time, the user is focusing on the first For the content displayed in the floating window area 902, this embodiment of the application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度至少高于主窗口区域901的显示亮度,其中,第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,主窗口区域901的显示亮度低于第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度。The display brightness of the first floating window area 902 is at least higher than the display brightness of the main window area 901, wherein the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 can be determined according to the brightness parameters of the screen, and the display brightness of the main window area 901 is lower than the first The display brightness of the floating window area 902 .
第二悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度可以与第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度相同或者低于第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度。The display brightness of the second floating window area 902 may be the same as or lower than the display brightness of the first floating window area 902 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,为了使得用户更容易分辨主窗口区域901和第二悬浮窗区域903,第二悬浮窗区域903的显示亮度可以高于主窗口区域901的显示亮度,低于第一悬浮窗区域902的显示亮度。In a possible implementation, in order to make it easier for the user to distinguish between the main window area 901 and the second floating window area 903, the display brightness of the second floating window area 903 may be higher than that of the main window area 901 and lower than that of the second floating window area 901. A display brightness of the floating window area 902 .
如果焦点区域位于第二悬浮窗区域903中,将第二悬浮窗区域903确定为用户的注视区域,主窗口区域901和第一悬浮窗区域902确定为非注视区域,此时用户正在关注第二悬浮窗区域903中显示的内容,本申请实施例提供的显示亮度设置方式可以参考焦点区域位于第一悬浮窗区域902时的显示亮度设置方式,区别仅在于将第一悬浮窗区域902和第二悬浮窗区域903互换,这里不赘述。If the focus area is located in the second floating window area 903, the second floating window area 903 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the main window area 901 and the first floating window area 902 are determined as non-gazing areas. At this time, the user is focusing on the second For the content displayed in the floating window area 903, the display brightness setting method provided by the embodiment of the present application can refer to the display brightness setting method when the focus area is located in the first floating window area 902, the only difference is that the first floating window area 902 and the second floating window area 902 The floating window area 903 is interchanged, and details are not described here.
在焦点区域所在的区域发生变化,也即用户的注视区域发生变化时,例如从主窗口区域901变为第一悬浮窗区域902,从第一悬浮窗区域902变为主窗口区域901再变为第二悬浮窗区域903,等等,各个区域的显示亮度可能会随之发生变化,此时,每个区域的显示亮度的变化可以是直接变化,也可以通过渐变的方式实现,具体可 以参考图3中的对应说明,这里不赘述。When the area where the focus area is located changes, that is, when the user's gaze area changes, for example, from the main window area 901 to the first floating window area 902, from the first floating window area 902 to the main window area 901 and then to The second floating window area 903, etc., the display brightness of each area may change accordingly. At this time, the change of the display brightness of each area can be directly changed, or it can be realized through a gradual change. For details, please refer to the figure The corresponding instructions in 3 are not repeated here.
举例来说,例如图10中第1幅图所示,界面初始显示亮度相同;例如图10中第2幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于左侧的悬浮窗中,该悬浮窗对应的界面区域的显示亮度为正常亮度(也即第1幅图中的初始显示亮度),右侧悬浮窗对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,其他界面区域的显示亮度为0;例如图10中第3幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于右侧的悬浮窗中,该悬浮窗对应的界面区域的变为正常亮度,左侧悬浮窗对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,其他界面区域的显示亮度为0。For example, as shown in the first picture in Figure 10, the initial display brightness of the interface is the same; for example, as shown in the second picture in Figure 10, the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in the left floating window, and the floating window corresponds to The display brightness of the interface area is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to the floating window on the right becomes lower, and the display brightness of other interface areas is 0; for example, in Figure 10 As shown in the third picture, the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in the floating window on the right, the interface area corresponding to the floating window becomes normal brightness, the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to the left floating window becomes low, and other interfaces The display brightness of the area is 0.
基于图9所示的场景,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,具体流程可以参考图8A所示的界面显示方法,与图8A所示方法的区别主要在于:注视区域从主窗口区域或者悬浮窗区域进一步扩展为:主窗口区域、第一悬浮窗区域或者第二悬浮窗区域,且三个区域的显示亮度设置方式稍有差别,具体可以参考图9中的对应说明。Based on the scene shown in Figure 9, this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, the specific process can refer to the interface display method shown in Figure 8A, the main difference from the method shown in Figure 8A is that the focus area is changed from the main window area or The floating window area is further expanded into: the main window area, the first floating window area or the second floating window area, and the display brightness setting methods of the three areas are slightly different. For details, please refer to the corresponding description in FIG. 9 .
本申请实施例提供分屏显示场景下的界面显示方法,如图2E所示,包括第一分屏窗口205和第二分屏窗口206,如图11A所示,两个窗口将界面110划分为第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112。第一分屏区域111是界面中第一分屏窗口所在的区域,第二分屏区域112是界面中第二分屏窗口所在的区域。The embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in a split-screen display scene, as shown in FIG. 2E, including a first split-screen window 205 and a second split-screen window 206. As shown in FIG. 11A, the two windows divide the interface 110 into The first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 . The first split-screen area 111 is the area where the first split-screen window is located in the interface, and the second split-screen area 112 is the area where the second split-screen window is located in the interface.
现有技术中界面的显示亮度根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,因此,第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112的显示亮度相同。In the prior art, the display brightness of the interface is determined according to the brightness parameter of the screen, therefore, the display brightness of the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 are the same.
在本申请实施例界面显示方法中,根据焦点区域位于第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112中的哪个区域来调整上述两个区域的显示亮度。In the interface display method of the embodiment of the present application, according to which area the focus area is located in the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 , the display brightness of the above two areas is adjusted.
如果焦点区域位于第一分屏区域111中,将第一分屏区域111确定为用户的注视区域,第二分屏区域112确定为非注视区域,此时用户正在关注第一分屏区域111中显示的内容,本申请实施例提供以下可能的显示亮度设置方式:If the focus area is located in the first split screen area 111, the first split screen area 111 is determined as the user's gaze area, and the second split screen area 112 is determined as a non-gazing area, and the user is paying attention to the first split screen area 111 at this time For the displayed content, the embodiment of this application provides the following possible display brightness setting methods:
第一分屏区域111的显示亮度高于第二分屏区域112部分或者全部区域的显示亮度。可选地,第一分屏区域111的显示亮度可以根据屏幕的亮度参数确定,第二分屏区域112的显示亮度低于第一分屏区域111的显示亮度。The display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 is higher than the display brightness of part or all of the second split-screen area 112 . Optionally, the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 may be determined according to a brightness parameter of the screen, and the display brightness of the second split-screen area 112 is lower than the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111 .
其中,第二分屏区域112可以划分子区域,不同子区域的显示亮度可以相同或者不同,各个子区域的显示亮度不高于第一分屏区域111的显示亮度,且至少一个子区域的显示亮度低于第二分屏区域112的显示亮度。Wherein, the second split-screen area 112 can be divided into sub-areas, the display brightness of different sub-areas can be the same or different, the display brightness of each sub-area is not higher than the display brightness of the first split-screen area 111, and the display brightness of at least one sub-area The brightness is lower than the display brightness of the second split screen area 112 .
如果焦点区域位于第二分屏区域112,两个区域的显示亮度设置方式可以参考焦点区域位于第一分屏区域111时的说明,区别仅在于将第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112互换。If the focus area is located in the second split screen area 112, the display brightness setting method of the two areas can refer to the description when the focus area is located in the first split screen area 111, the only difference is that the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 swaps.
需要说明的是,如果焦点区域从一个区域移动至另一个区域,也即注视区域发生变化,第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112的显示亮度可能发生变化,每个区域的显示亮度的变化可以是直接变化,也可以通过渐变的方式实现,具体可以参考前述实施例中的对应说明,这里不赘述。It should be noted that if the focus area moves from one area to another, that is, the gaze area changes, the display brightness of the first split screen area 111 and the second split screen area 112 may change, and the display brightness of each area The change of can be a direct change or a gradual change. For details, please refer to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
以手机中分屏显示窗口A和窗口B为例,参见图11B所示,例如图11B中第1幅图所示,界面初始显示亮度相同;例如图11B中第2幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于窗口A中,窗口A对应的界面区域的显示亮度为正常亮度(也即第1幅图中的初始显示亮度),窗口B对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,最低可为0;例如图11B中第3幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于窗口B中,窗口B对应的界面区域的变为正常亮度,窗口A对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,最低可为0。Take the split-screen display of window A and window B in the mobile phone as an example, as shown in Figure 11B. For example, as shown in the first picture in Figure 11B, the initial display brightness of the interface is the same; It is detected that the focus area is located in window A, the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes lower, the lowest being 0; For example, as shown in the third picture in Figure 11B, the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in window B, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes normal, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A becomes low, the lowest possible is 0.
基于图11A所示的场景,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,具体流程可以参考图8A所示的方法,与图8A所示方法的区别主要在于:注视区域在第一分屏区域111和第二分屏区域112之间变化,且两个区域的显示亮度设置方式稍有差别,具体可以参考图11A中的对应说明。Based on the scene shown in Figure 11A, this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, the specific process can refer to the method shown in Figure 8A, the main difference from the method shown in Figure 8A is that the focus area is in the first split screen area 111 and the second split-screen area 112, and the display brightness settings of the two areas are slightly different, for details, please refer to the corresponding description in FIG. 11A.
本申请实施例提供平行视界场景下的界面显示方法,如图2F所示,包括第一平行视界窗口和第二平行视界窗口,如图12A所示,两个窗口将界面120划分为第一平行视界区域121和第二平行视界区域122。第一平行视界区域121是界面中第一平行视界窗口所在的区域,第二平行视界区域122是界面中第二平行视界窗口所在的区域。The embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method in the parallel horizon scene, as shown in Figure 2F, including the first parallel horizon window and the second parallel horizon window, as shown in Figure 12A, the two windows divide the interface 120 into the first parallel horizon window. The viewing horizon area 121 and the second parallel viewing horizon area 122 . The first parallel horizon area 121 is the area where the first parallel horizon window is located in the interface, and the second parallel horizon area 122 is the area where the second parallel horizon window is located in the interface.
本申请实施例中,图12A所示场景下第一平行视界区域121和第二平行视界区域122的显示亮度设置方式可以参考图11A中分屏显示场景下的对应说明,区别主要在于:将第一分屏区域替换为第一平行视界区域,将第二分屏区域替换为第二平行视界区域,这里不赘述。In the embodiment of the present application, the display brightness setting method of the first parallel horizon area 121 and the second parallel horizon area 122 in the scene shown in FIG. 12A can refer to the corresponding description in the split-screen display scene in FIG. One split screen area is replaced by the first parallel horizon area, and the second split screen area is replaced by the second parallel horizon area, which will not be described here.
以PAD中平行视界方式显示窗口A和窗口B为例,参见图12B所示,例如图12B中第1幅图所示,界面初始显示亮度相同;例如图12B中第2幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于窗口A中,窗口A对应的界面区域的显示亮度为正常亮度(也即第1幅图中的初始显示亮度),窗口B对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,最低可为0;例如图12B中第3幅图所示,电子设备检测到焦点区域位于窗口B中,窗口B对应的界面区域的变为正常亮度,窗口A对应的界面区域的显示亮度变低,最低可为0。Take the display of window A and window B in the parallel view mode in the PAD as an example, as shown in Figure 12B. For example, as shown in the first picture in Figure 12B, the initial display brightness of the interface is the same; The device detects that the focus area is located in window A, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A is normal brightness (that is, the initial display brightness in the first picture), and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes lower, the lowest possible is 0; for example, as shown in the third picture in Figure 12B, the electronic device detects that the focus area is located in window B, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window B becomes normal, and the display brightness of the interface area corresponding to window A becomes low, the lowest. Can be 0.
基于图12A所示的场景,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,具体流程可以参考图8A所示的方法,与图8A所示方法的区别主要在于:注视区域在第一平行视界区域121和第二平行视界区域122之间变化,且两个区域的显示亮度设置方式稍有差别,具体可以参考图12A中的对应说明。Based on the scene shown in FIG. 12A, this embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method. The specific process can refer to the method shown in FIG. 8A. The main difference from the method shown in FIG. and the second parallel horizon region 122, and the display brightness settings of the two regions are slightly different, for details, please refer to the corresponding description in FIG. 12A.
图13所示为本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的软件结构框图,该软件结构适用于图3~图5所示的实施例。电子设备以图1B中将安卓(Android)系统分为四层为例,从上至下分别为应用层,框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。FIG. 13 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the software structure is applicable to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 . The electronic device is divided into four layers of the Android system in FIG. 1B as an example. From top to bottom, it is the application layer, the framework layer, the Android runtime (Android runtime) and the system library, and the kernel layer.
应用层(Application,App)可以包括:Application layer (Application, App) can include:
屏幕显示模块,用于根据省电指令确定执行省电策略,接收电量控制模块发送的 焦点区域、窗口的边界参数等信息;The screen display module is used to determine and execute the power saving strategy according to the power saving instruction, and receive information such as the focus area and the boundary parameters of the window sent by the power control module;
界面显示模块,用于确定注视区域,显示界面,并调整界面中注视区域和/或非注视区域的显示亮度。The interface display module is used to determine the fixation area, display the interface, and adjust the display brightness of the fixation area and/or non-attention area in the interface.
界面显示模块,用于显示界面。The interface display module is used for displaying the interface.
框架层(Framework,FWK)可以包括:The framework layer (Framework, FWK) can include:
窗口显示省电框架,省电框架中可以包括:The window displays the power saving frame, which can include:
监听模块,用于监听系统库层上报的眼球注视事件,其中包括眼球图像数据;The monitoring module is used to monitor eye gaze events reported by the system library layer, including eye image data;
眼球注视服务模块,用于接收到眼球注视事件,请求窗口类型管理模块判断当前窗口显示类型;The eye gaze service module is used to receive the eye gaze event and request the window type management module to determine the display type of the current window;
窗口类型管理模块,用于记录当前的窗口显示类型,包括:单窗口类型、多窗口类型,多窗口类型还可以进一步细分为:单悬浮窗、多悬浮窗、分屏显示、平行视界等类型;The window type management module is used to record the current window display type, including: single window type, multi-window type, and multi-window type can be further subdivided into: single-suspended window, multi-suspended window, split-screen display, parallel horizon and other types ;
各窗口显示类型对应的窗口管理模块,用于管理屏幕中窗口的边界参数等信息,根据图像数据计算焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数、焦点区域等信息发送至电量控制模块。The window management module corresponding to each window display type is used to manage information such as boundary parameters of the window in the screen, calculate the focus area according to the image data, and send information such as window boundary parameters and focus area to the power control module.
窗口管理模块可以包括:单窗口管理模块、单悬浮窗管理模块、多悬浮窗管理模块、平行视界管理模块、分屏管理模块等,分别与窗口显示类型对应。The window management module may include: a single window management module, a single floating window management module, a multi-suspension window management module, a parallel horizon management module, a split-screen management module, etc., respectively corresponding to the window display types.
电量控制模块,用于记录是否执行省电策略,如果执行省电策略,将省电指令、窗口的边界参数、焦点区域等信息发送至屏幕显示模块。The power control module is used to record whether the power saving strategy is implemented, and if the power saving strategy is implemented, information such as power saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas are sent to the screen display module.
显示框架,用于对界面进行绘制渲染等处理。The display frame is used for processing such as drawing and rendering of the interface.
系统库可以包括:摄像头模块和显示模块。System libraries can include: camera module and display module.
内核层可以包括:摄像头驱动和显示驱动。摄像头驱动用于驱动硬件层的摄像头,显示驱动用于驱动硬件层的显示屏,也即本申请实施例中电子设备的屏幕。The kernel layer can include: camera driver and display driver. The camera driver is used to drive the camera of the hardware layer, and the display driver is used to drive the display screen of the hardware layer, that is, the screen of the electronic device in the embodiment of the present application.
基于图13所示的软件结构,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图14所示,该方法是将图5所示界面显示方法结合图13所示软件结构下的流程示意图,如图14所示,其中,相对于图13所示的软件结构,增加了注视区域确定模块,用于记录注视区域的预设尺寸,例如长宽等。Based on the software structure shown in Figure 13, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 14, the method is to combine the interface display method shown in Figure 5 with the schematic flowchart of the software structure shown in Figure 13, as shown in As shown in FIG. 14 , in which, compared with the software structure shown in FIG. 13 , a gaze area determination module is added to record the preset size of the gaze area, such as length and width.
硬件层的摄像头接收到眼球注视事件,触发中断,用以通知内核层的摄像头驱动获取眼球图像数据;摄像头驱动接收到中断,获取眼球图像数据,转换为眼球注视事件,通过系统库中的摄像头模块传输至框架层的监听模块;监听模块监听到眼球注视事件,将眼球注视事件发送至眼球注视服务模块,眼球注视服务模块请求窗口类型管理模块判断当前窗口类型;窗口类型管理模块确定当前窗口显示类型为单窗口类型,将眼球注视事件发送至单窗口管理模块;单窗口管理模块确定焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数和焦点区域信息发送至电量控制模块;电量控制模块确定需要执行省电策略,将省电指令、窗口边界参数和焦点区域等信息发送至应用层的屏幕显示模块;屏幕显示模块确定接收到省电指令,将焦点区域、窗口边界参数等信息发送至注视区域确定模块;注视区域确定模块将焦点区域、窗口边界参数、注视区域 尺寸发送至界面显示模块;界面显示模块确定注视区域和非注视区域,调整所显示界面中注视区域和/或非注视区域的显示亮度,具体的,界面显示模块可以通过显示框架、显示模块以及显示驱动将所需显示界面在显示屏中显示,显示屏中显示的界面中注视区域的显示亮度高于非注视区域中全部或部分区域的显示亮度。The camera at the hardware layer receives the eye gaze event and triggers an interrupt to notify the camera driver at the kernel layer to obtain the eye image data; the camera driver receives the interrupt, obtains the eye image data, converts it into an eye gaze event, and passes through the camera module in the system library Transmission to the monitoring module of the framework layer; the monitoring module monitors the eye gaze event, and sends the eye gaze event to the eye gaze service module, and the eye gaze service module requests the window type management module to determine the current window type; the window type management module determines the current window display type It is a single-window type, and the eye gaze event is sent to the single-window management module; the single-window management module determines the focus area, and sends the boundary parameters of the window and the focus area information to the power control module; Information such as power-saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas are sent to the screen display module of the application layer; the screen display module determines that the power-saving instruction has been received, and sends information such as the focus area and window boundary parameters to the gaze area determination module; the gaze area is determined The module sends the focus area, window boundary parameters, and gaze area size to the interface display module; the interface display module determines the gaze area and the non-focus area, and adjusts the display brightness of the gaze area and/or the non-focus area in the displayed interface, specifically, the interface The display module can display the required display interface on the display screen through the display frame, the display module and the display driver. The display brightness of the gazing area in the interface displayed on the display screen is higher than that of all or part of the non-gazing area.
基于图13所示的软件结构,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图15所示,该方法是在图13所示软件结构下图8A所示方法的流程示意图,如图15所示,其中,Based on the software structure shown in Figure 13, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 15, the method is a schematic flow chart of the method shown in Figure 8A under the software structure shown in Figure 13, as shown in Figure 15 show, among them,
硬件层的摄像头接收到眼球注视事件,触发中断,用以通知内核层的摄像头驱动获取眼球图像数据;摄像头驱动接收到中断,获取眼球图像数据,转换为眼球注视事件,通过系统库中的摄像头模块传输至框架层的监听模块;监听模块监听到眼球注视事件,将眼球注视事件发送至眼球注视服务模块,眼球注视服务模块请求窗口类型管理模块判断当前窗口类型;窗口类型管理模块确定当前窗口显示类型为单悬浮窗类型,将眼球注视事件发送至单窗口管理模块;单悬浮窗管理模块确定焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数和焦点区域信息发送至电量控制模块;电量控制模块确定需要执行省电策略,将省电指令、窗口边界参数和焦点区域等信息发送至应用层的屏幕显示模块;屏幕显示模块确定接收到省电指令,将焦点区域、窗口边界参数等信息发送至界面显示模块;界面显示模块确定注视区域和非注视区域,调整所显示界面中注视区域和/或非注视区域的显示亮度,具体的,界面显示模块可以通过显示框架、显示模块以及显示驱动将所需显示界面在显示屏中显示,显示屏中显示的界面中注视区域的显示亮度高于非注视区域中全部或部分区域的显示亮度。The camera at the hardware layer receives the eye gaze event and triggers an interrupt to notify the camera driver at the kernel layer to obtain the eye image data; the camera driver receives the interrupt, obtains the eye image data, converts it into an eye gaze event, and passes through the camera module in the system library Transmission to the monitoring module of the framework layer; the monitoring module monitors the eye gaze event, and sends the eye gaze event to the eye gaze service module, and the eye gaze service module requests the window type management module to determine the current window type; the window type management module determines the current window display type It is a single-suspension window type, and sends eye gaze events to the single-window management module; the single-suspension window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; the power control module determines that it is necessary to implement a power saving strategy , sending information such as power-saving instructions, window boundary parameters, and focus areas to the screen display module of the application layer; the screen display module determines that the power-saving instruction has been received, and sends information such as focus areas, window boundary parameters, etc. to the interface display module; the interface display The module determines the gazing area and the non-gazing area, and adjusts the display brightness of the gazing area and/or the non-gazing area in the displayed interface. Specifically, the interface display module can display the required display interface on the display screen through the display frame, display module, and display driver. In the middle display, the display brightness of the gazing area in the interface displayed on the display screen is higher than the display brightness of all or part of the non-gazing area.
基于图13所示的软件结构,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图16所示,该方法适用于图9所示场景,如图16所示,其与图15所示方法的区别主要在于:窗口类型管理模块确定当前窗口显示类型为多悬浮窗类型,将眼球注视事件发送至多窗口管理模块;多悬浮窗管理模块确定焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数和焦点区域信息发送至电量控制模;其他部分的实现可以参考前述实施例中的对应描述,这里不赘述。Based on the software structure shown in Figure 13, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 16, this method is applicable to the scene shown in Figure 9, as shown in Figure 16, it is different from the method shown in Figure 15 The main difference is: the window type management module determines that the current window display type is a multi-suspension window type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the multi-window management module; the multi-suspension window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the battery The control module; the implementation of other parts can refer to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
基于图13所示的软件结构,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图17所示,该方法适用于图11A所示场景,如图17所示,其与图15所示方法的区别主要在于:窗口类型管理模块确定当前窗口显示类型为分屏显示类型,将眼球注视事件发送至分屏窗口管理模块;分屏窗口管理模块确定焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数和焦点区域信息发送至电量控制模;其他部分的实现可以参考前述实施例中的对应描述,这里不赘述。Based on the software structure shown in FIG. 13, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in FIG. The main difference is: the window type management module determines that the current window display type is split-screen display type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the split-screen window management module; the split-screen window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; for the implementation of other parts, reference may be made to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
基于图13所示的软件结构,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示方法,如图18所示,该方法适用于图12A所示场景,如图18所示,其与图15所示方法的区别主要在于:窗口类型管理模块确定当前窗口显示类型为平行视界显示类型,将眼球注视事件发送至平行视界窗口管理模块;平行视界窗口管理模块确定焦点区域,将窗口的边界参数和焦点区域信息发送至电量控制模;其他部分的实现可以参考前述实施例中的对应描述,这里不赘述。Based on the software structure shown in Figure 13, the embodiment of the present application provides an interface display method, as shown in Figure 18, this method is applicable to the scene shown in Figure 12A, as shown in Figure 18, it is different from the method shown in Figure 15 The main difference is: the window type management module determines that the current window display type is the parallel horizon display type, and sends the eyeball gaze event to the parallel horizon window management module; the parallel horizon window management module determines the focus area, and sends the window boundary parameters and focus area information to the power control module; for the implementation of other parts, reference may be made to the corresponding descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
如图19所示,本申请实施例提供一种界面显示装置,该装置1900包括:检测单元1910和调整单元1920,其中,As shown in FIG. 19 , an embodiment of the present application provides an interface display device. The device 1900 includes: a detection unit 1910 and an adjustment unit 1920 , wherein,
检测单元1910,用于检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域;第一界面是电子设备的屏幕上显示的界面;The detection unit 1910 is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
调整单元1920,用于调整第一界面的显示亮度,得到第二界面,第二界面中注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度;非注视区域是界面中注视区域以外的区域。The adjustment unit 1920 is used to adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain a second interface, the brightness of the gaze area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the areas in the non-gazing area; the non-gazing area is an area other than the gaze area in the interface .
在一种可能的实现方式中,检测单元1910用于检测用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the detection unit 1910 is configured to detect the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface, including:
检测单元1910用于:确定用户眼球的注视焦点在界面中对应的焦点区域;根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域。The detection unit 1910 is configured to: determine the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeball in the interface; and determine the gaze area of the user's eyeball in the interface according to the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,检测单元1910用于根据焦点区域确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the detection unit 1910 is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area, including:
检测单元1910用于:根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示或多窗口显示。The detection unit 1910 is configured to: determine the gaze area of the user's eyes in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, where the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为单窗口显示,检测单元1910用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is single-window display, and the detection unit 1910 is configured to determine the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the interface according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface, including:
检测单元1910用于:根据焦点区域确定注视区域,注视区域包括焦点区域。The detecting unit 1910 is configured to: determine a gaze area according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;检测单元1910用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by the windows; the detection unit 1910 is used to determine the user's eyeball position according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. Gaze areas in the interface, including:
检测单元1910用于:The detection unit 1910 is used for:
从至少2个窗口区域中获取第一窗口区域,第一窗口区域是至少2个窗口区域中与焦点区域的相交区域最大的窗口区域;Acquire a first window area from at least two window areas, where the first window area is the window area with the largest intersection area with the focus area among the at least two window areas;
将第一窗口区域确定为注视区域。The first window area is determined as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;检测单元1910用于根据焦点区域和第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定用户的眼球在界面中的注视区域,包括:In a possible implementation, the window display type is multi-window display, and the interface is divided into at least two window areas by the windows; the detection unit 1910 is used to determine the user's eyeball position according to the focus area and the current window display type of the first interface. Gaze areas in the interface, including:
检测单元1910用于:The detection unit 1910 is used for:
确定至少2个窗口区域中各窗口区域与焦点区域的相交区域相等;Determining that the intersection area between each window area and the focus area in at least two window areas is equal;
维持前一周期确定的注视区域和非注视区域不变;或者,Maintain the fixation area and non-fixation area determined in the previous cycle; or,
从至少2个窗口区域中选择一个非全屏窗口对应的窗口区域作为注视区域。Select a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from at least two window areas as the gaze area.
在一种可能的实现方式中,多窗口显示包括:单悬浮窗显示,和/或,多悬浮窗显示,和/或,分屏显示,和/或,平行视界显示。In a possible implementation manner, the multi-window display includes: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel view display.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元1920用于:获取第一目标亮度,将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度。The adjustment unit 1920 is configured to: obtain the first target brightness, and adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
调整单元1920用于:The adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度;和/或,adjusting the brightness of the gaze area directly to the first target brightness; and/or,
将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于将注视区域的亮度调整为第一目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness, including:
调整单元1920用于:The adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;和/或,The power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; and/or,
电量小于第一阈值,不小于第二阈值,按照第二步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至第一目标亮度;第一阈值大于第二阈值,第一步长小于第二步长;和/或,The power is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the first step is smaller than the second step; and/or ,
电量小于第二阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为第一目标亮度。If the power is less than the second threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元1920用于:获取非注视区域的亮度设置策略,按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度。The adjustment unit 1920 is configured to: acquire a brightness setting policy of the non-focus area, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area according to the brightness setting policy.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于按照亮度设置策略调整非注视区域的亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area according to a brightness setting strategy, including:
调整单元1920用于:根据亮度设置策略确定第二目标亮度,将非注视区域的亮度调整为第二目标亮度。The adjusting unit 1920 is configured to: determine the second target brightness according to the brightness setting strategy, and adjust the brightness of the non-focus area to the second target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness, including:
调整单元1920用于:The adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
将非注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度;和/或,directly adjust the brightness of the non-focused area to the target brightness; and/or,
将非注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度。Fade the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于将非注视区域的亮度调整为目标亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness, including:
调整单元1920用于:The adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
电量不小于第三阈值,按照第三步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;和/或,The power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; and/or,
电量小于第三阈值,不小于第四阈值,按照第四步长将注视区域的亮度渐变至目标亮度;第三阈值大于第四阈值,第三步长小于第四步长;和/或,The power is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the third step is smaller than the fourth step; and/or,
电量小于第四阈值,将注视区域的亮度直接调整为目标亮度。If the power is less than the fourth threshold, the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,亮度设置策略包括:In a possible implementation manner, the brightness setting strategy includes:
非注视区域划分为若干个子区域,按照若干个子区域与注视区域的距离从小到大的顺序,子区域的亮度依次降低,子区域的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,The non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases successively according to the order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area from small to large, and the maximum brightness of the sub-area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
按照非注视区域的像素点与注视区域的边界线的最小距离从小到大的顺序,像素点的亮度依次降低,非注视区域的像素点的最大亮度小于等于第一目标亮度;或者,According to the order of the smallest distance between the pixels in the non-focused area and the boundary line of the focused area, the brightness of the pixels decreases successively, and the maximum brightness of the pixels in the non-focused area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
设置非注视区域的亮度为第二目标亮度,第二目标亮度小于第一目标亮度。The brightness of the non-attention area is set as the second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,调整单元1920用于调整界面的显示亮度,包括:In a possible implementation manner, the adjustment unit 1920 is configured to adjust the display brightness of the interface, including:
调整单元1920用于:The adjustment unit 1920 is used for:
在界面上增加显示透明蒙版层;Add a display transparent mask layer on the interface;
设置透明蒙版层的颜色和/或透明度,使得注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度。Set the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer so that the focus area is brighter than some or all of the non-focus area.
本申请实施例提供一种电子设备,包括显示器和处理器;其中,处理器用于执行上述图3~图18任一实施例提供的方法。An embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including a display and a processor; wherein, the processor is configured to execute the method provided in any one of the above embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 .
本申请还提供一种电子设备,所述设备包括存储介质和中央处理器,所述存储介质可以是非易失性存储介质,所述存储介质中存储有计算机可执行程序,所述中央处理器与所述非易失性存储介质连接,并执行所述计算机可执行程序以实现本申请图3~图18任一实施例提供的方法。The present application also provides an electronic device, the device includes a storage medium and a central processing unit, the storage medium may be a non-volatile storage medium, a computer executable program is stored in the storage medium, and the central processing unit and the The non-volatile storage medium is connected, and executes the computer executable program to implement the method provided in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请图3~图18任一实施例提供的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program. When it is run on a computer, the computer executes the program provided by any one of the embodiments in Fig. 3 to Fig. 18 of the present application. method.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请图3~图18任一实施例提供的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the computer executes the method provided in any one of the embodiments in FIG. 3 to FIG. 18 of the present application.
本申请实施例中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况。其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项”及其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项或复数项的任意组合。例如,a,b和c中的至少一项可以表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c或a和b和c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, "at least one" means one or more, and "multiple" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B may indicate that A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone. Among them, A and B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" and similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single items or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, and c can represent: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c or a and b and c, where a, b, c can be single, or Can be multiple.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,本文中公开的实施例中描述的各单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art can appreciate that each unit and algorithm steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be realized by a combination of electronic hardware, computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,任一功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包 括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory;以下简称:ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory;以下简称:RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。In several embodiments provided in this application, if any function is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory; hereinafter referred to as: ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter referred to as: RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc, etc. A medium on which program code can be stored.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The foregoing is only a specific implementation of the present application. Any person skilled in the art within the technical scope disclosed in the present application can easily think of changes or substitutions, which should be covered by the protection scope of the present application. The protection scope of the present application shall be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (17)

  1. 一种界面显示方法,应用于电子设备,其特征在于,包括:An interface display method applied to electronic equipment, characterized in that it includes:
    检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域;所述第一界面是所述电子设备的屏幕上显示的界面;Detecting the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface; the first interface is an interface displayed on the screen of the electronic device;
    调整所述第一界面的显示亮度,得到第二界面,所述第二界面中所述注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度;所述非注视区域是所述界面中所述注视区域以外的区域。Adjust the display brightness of the first interface to obtain a second interface, the brightness of the fixation area in the second interface is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-gazing areas; Areas other than the above-mentioned fixation area.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述检测用户的眼球在第一界面中的注视区域,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the detecting the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface comprises:
    确定所述用户眼球的注视焦点在所述第一界面中对应的焦点区域;determining the focus area corresponding to the gaze focus of the user's eyeballs in the first interface;
    根据所述焦点区域确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域。A gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface is determined according to the focus area.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述焦点区域确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface according to the focus area comprises:
    根据所述焦点区域和所述第一界面当前的窗口显示类型确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域,所述窗口显示类型为单窗口显示或多窗口显示。A gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface is determined according to the focus area and a current window display type of the first interface, where the window display type is single-window display or multi-window display.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述窗口显示类型为单窗口显示,所述根据所述焦点区域和所述窗口显示类型确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the window display type is single-window display, and determining the position of the user's eyes in the first interface according to the focus area and the window display type Focus area, including:
    根据所述焦点区域确定所述注视区域,所述注视区域包括所述焦点区域。The gaze area is determined according to the focus area, and the gaze area includes the focus area.
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,所述第一界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;所述根据所述焦点区域和所述窗口显示类型确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the window display type is multi-window display, and the first interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; The type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface, including:
    从所述至少2个窗口区域中获取第一窗口区域,所述第一窗口区域是所述至少2个窗口区域中与所述焦点区域的相交区域最大的窗口区域;acquiring a first window area from the at least 2 window areas, where the first window area is the window area of the at least 2 window areas with the largest intersection area with the focus area;
    将所述第一窗口区域确定为所述注视区域。Determine the first window area as the gaze area.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述窗口显示类型为多窗口显示,所述第一界面被窗口划分为至少2个窗口区域;所述根据所述焦点区域和所述窗口显示类型确定所述用户的眼球在所述第一界面中的注视区域,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the window display type is multi-window display, and the first interface is divided into at least two window areas by windows; The type determines the gaze area of the user's eyeballs in the first interface, including:
    确定所述至少2个窗口区域中各窗口区域与所述焦点区域的相交区域相等;determining that the intersection area between each window area of the at least two window areas and the focus area is equal;
    维持前一周期确定的注视区域和非注视区域不变;或者,Maintain the fixation area and non-fixation area determined in the previous cycle; or,
    从所述至少2个窗口区域中选择一个非全屏窗口对应的窗口区域作为所述注视区域。Selecting a window area corresponding to a non-full-screen window from the at least two window areas as the gaze area.
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多窗口显示包括:单悬浮窗显示,和/或,多悬浮窗显示,和/或,分屏显示,和/或,平行视界显示。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the multi-window display comprises: single floating window display, and/or, multiple floating window display, and/or, split-screen display, and/or, parallel horizon show.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调整所述第一界面的显示亮度,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the adjusting the display brightness of the first interface comprises:
    获取第一目标亮度,将所述注视区域的亮度调整为所述第一目标亮度。Acquire a first target brightness, and adjust the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述将所述注视区域的亮度调整为所述第一目标亮度,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness comprises:
    将所述注视区域的亮度直接调整为所述第一目标亮度;或者,directly adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness; or,
    将所述注视区域的亮度渐变至所述第一目标亮度。Gradually change the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness.
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述将所述注视区域的亮度调整为所述第一目标亮度,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the adjusting the brightness of the gaze area to the first target brightness comprises:
    获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
    所述电量不小于第一阈值,按照第一步长将所述注视区域的亮度渐变至所述第一目标亮度;或者,The power is not less than the first threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the first step; or,
    所述电量小于所述第一阈值,不小于第二阈值,按照第二步长将所述注视区域的亮度渐变至所述第一目标亮度;所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值,所述第一步长小于所述第二步长;或者,The electric quantity is less than the first threshold and not less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the first target brightness according to the second step size; the first threshold is greater than the second threshold, so said first step size is less than said second step size; or,
    所述电量小于所述第二阈值,将所述注视区域的亮度直接调整为所述第一目标亮度。The electric quantity is less than the second threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the first target brightness.
  11. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调整所述第一界面的显示亮度,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the adjusting the display brightness of the first interface comprises:
    获取所述非注视区域的亮度设置策略,按照所述亮度设置策略调整所述非注视区域的亮度。The brightness setting policy of the non-focus area is acquired, and the brightness of the non-focus area is adjusted according to the brightness setting policy.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述按照所述亮度设置策略调整所述非注视区域的亮度,包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area according to the brightness setting strategy comprises:
    根据所述亮度设置策略确定第二目标亮度,将所述非注视区域的亮度调整为所述第二目标亮度。A second target brightness is determined according to the brightness setting policy, and the brightness of the non-watching area is adjusted to the second target brightness.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述将所述非注视区域的亮度调整为所述目标亮度,包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness comprises:
    将所述非注视区域的亮度直接调整为所述目标亮度;和/或,directly adjusting the brightness of the non-focus area to the target brightness; and/or,
    将所述非注视区域的亮度渐变至所述目标亮度。Gradually change the brightness of the non-attention area to the target brightness.
  14. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述将所述非注视区域的亮度调整为所述目标亮度,包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the adjusting the brightness of the non-gazing area to the target brightness comprises:
    获取电源的电量;Obtain the power of the power supply;
    所述电量不小于第三阈值,按照第三步长将所述注视区域的亮度渐变至所述目标亮度;或者,The power is not less than the third threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the third step length; or,
    所述电量小于所述第三阈值,不小于第四阈值,按照第四步长将所述注视区域的亮度渐变至所述目标亮度;所述第三阈值大于所述第四阈值,所述第三步长小于所述第四步长;或者,The electric quantity is less than the third threshold and not less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is gradually changed to the target brightness according to the fourth step; the third threshold is greater than the fourth threshold, and the first three steps less than said fourth step; or,
    所述电量小于所述第四阈值,将所述注视区域的亮度直接调整为所述目标亮度。The electric quantity is less than the fourth threshold, and the brightness of the gaze area is directly adjusted to the target brightness.
  15. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述亮度设置策略包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the brightness setting strategy comprises:
    所述非注视区域划分为若干个子区域,按照所述若干个子区域与所述注视区域的距离从小到大的顺序,所述子区域的亮度依次降低,所述子区域的最大亮度小于 等于所述第一目标亮度;或者,The non-gazing area is divided into several sub-areas, and the brightness of the sub-areas decreases sequentially according to the ascending order of the distance between the several sub-areas and the watching area, and the maximum brightness of the sub-areas is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
    按照所述非注视区域的像素点与所述注视区域的边界线的最小距离从小到大的顺序,所述像素点的亮度依次降低,所述非注视区域的像素点的最大亮度小于等于所述第一目标亮度;或者,According to the order of the smallest distance between the pixels of the non-attention area and the boundary line of the attention area from small to large, the brightness of the pixels decreases sequentially, and the maximum brightness of the pixels of the non-attention area is less than or equal to the first target brightness; or,
    设置所述非注视区域的亮度为第二目标亮度,所述第二目标亮度小于所述第一目标亮度。The brightness of the non-attention area is set as a second target brightness, and the second target brightness is smaller than the first target brightness.
  16. 根据权利要求1至15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述调整所述第一界面的显示亮度,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein the adjusting the display brightness of the first interface comprises:
    在所述第一界面上增加显示透明蒙版层;Adding a display transparent mask layer on the first interface;
    设置所述透明蒙版层的颜色和/或透明度,使得所述注视区域的亮度大于非注视区域中部分或全部区域的亮度。Setting the color and/or transparency of the transparent mask layer, so that the brightness of the watching area is greater than the brightness of some or all of the non-watching areas.
  17. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:显示器和处理器;其中,所述处理器用于执行权利要求1至16任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized by comprising: a display and a processor; wherein the processor is configured to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 16.
PCT/CN2022/114916 2021-08-31 2022-08-25 Interface display method and electronic device WO2023030168A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202122085565 2021-08-31
CN202122085565.2 2021-08-31
CN202210563228.6A CN115729346A (en) 2021-08-31 2022-05-20 Interface display method and electronic equipment
CN202210563228.6 2022-05-20

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023030168A1 true WO2023030168A1 (en) 2023-03-09

Family

ID=85292405

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/114916 WO2023030168A1 (en) 2021-08-31 2022-08-25 Interface display method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115729346A (en)
WO (1) WO2023030168A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117372656A (en) * 2023-09-25 2024-01-09 广东工业大学 User interface display method, device and medium for mixed reality

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103853424A (en) * 2012-11-28 2014-06-11 三星电子株式会社 Display device and method of controlling the same
CN107728770A (en) * 2017-09-26 2018-02-23 努比亚技术有限公司 Screen luminance of terminal method of adjustment, mobile terminal and computer-readable recording medium
CN110032271A (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Contrast control device and its method, virtual reality device and storage medium
CN111601373A (en) * 2020-05-09 2020-08-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Backlight brightness control method and device, mobile terminal and storage medium

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103853424A (en) * 2012-11-28 2014-06-11 三星电子株式会社 Display device and method of controlling the same
CN107728770A (en) * 2017-09-26 2018-02-23 努比亚技术有限公司 Screen luminance of terminal method of adjustment, mobile terminal and computer-readable recording medium
CN110032271A (en) * 2018-01-12 2019-07-19 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Contrast control device and its method, virtual reality device and storage medium
CN111601373A (en) * 2020-05-09 2020-08-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Backlight brightness control method and device, mobile terminal and storage medium

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117372656A (en) * 2023-09-25 2024-01-09 广东工业大学 User interface display method, device and medium for mixed reality

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115729346A (en) 2023-03-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020259452A1 (en) Full-screen display method for mobile terminal, and apparatus
EP3872609B1 (en) Application display method and electronic device
WO2021169337A1 (en) In-screen fingerprint display method and electronic device
EP4131911A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
EP3787298A1 (en) Flexible screen display method and terminal
AU2020229917B2 (en) Recording frame rate control method and related apparatus
WO2021036585A1 (en) Flexible screen display method and electronic device
EP4012544A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
WO2023000772A1 (en) Mode switching method and apparatus, electronic device and chip system
US20230117194A1 (en) Communication Service Status Control Method, Terminal Device, and Readable Storage Medium
WO2022037726A1 (en) Split-screen display method and electronic device
US11990075B2 (en) Drive control method and related device
US11995317B2 (en) Method and apparatus for adjusting memory configuration parameter
WO2022001258A1 (en) Multi-screen display method and apparatus, terminal device, and storage medium
EP4280586A1 (en) Point light source image detection method and electronic device
CN111522425A (en) Power consumption control method of electronic equipment and electronic equipment
EP4020965A1 (en) Photography method and electronic device
WO2020233593A1 (en) Method for displaying foreground element, and electronic device
WO2022143180A1 (en) Collaborative display method, terminal device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2023030168A1 (en) Interface display method and electronic device
CN116048831B (en) Target signal processing method and electronic equipment
WO2022252972A1 (en) Window display method and electronic device
CN113781959B (en) Interface processing method and device
WO2024066834A1 (en) Vsync signal control method, electronic device, storage medium and chip
CN114596819B (en) Brightness adjusting method and related device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22863306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE